Page 1: Service Manual
Service Manual iR8500 Series Apr 5 2005...
Page 3 Canon will release technical information as the need arises. In the event of major changes in the contents of this manual over a long or short period, Canon will issue a new edition of this manual.
Page 4 Introduction Symbols Used This documentation uses the following symbols to indicate special information: Symbol Description Indicates an item of a non-specific nature, possibly classified as Note, Caution, or Warning. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid electric shocks. Indicates an item requiring care to avoid combustion (fire). Indicates an item prohibiting disassembly to avoid electric shocks or problems.
Page 5 Introduction The following rules apply throughout this Service Manual: 1. Each chapter contains sections explaining the purpose of specific functions and the relationship between electrical and mechanical systems with reference to the timing of operation. In the diagrams, represents the path of mechanical drive; where a signal name accompanies the symbol , the arrow indicates the direction of the electric signal.
Page 7: Table Of Contents
Contents Contents Chapter 1 Introduction 1.1 System Construction ..........................1- 1 1.1.1 System Configuration .............................. 1- 1 1.1.2 System Configuration .............................. 1- 1 1.1.3 System Configuration .............................. 1- 2 1.1.4 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration..................1- 3 1.1.5 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration..................1- 4 1.1.6 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration..................
Page 8 Contents 1.2.4.10 System Settings ................................... 1- 37 1.2.4.11 System Settings ................................... 1- 38 1.2.4.12 Network Settings (in "System Settings") ..........................1- 39 1.2.4.13 Copy Settings..................................1- 42 1.2.4.14 Copy Settings..................................1- 43 1.2.4.15 Communications Settings ..............................1- 43 1.2.4.16 Mail Box Settings ................................. 1- 44 1.2.4.17 Address Book Settings.................................
Page 9 Contents 2.2.15 Mounting the Charging Assembly........................2- 29 2.2.16 Mounting the Pickup Assembly..........................2- 31 2.2.17 Checking the Developing Assembly ........................2- 32 2.2.18 Checking the Developing Assembly ........................2- 32 2.2.19 Mounting the Control Panel ..........................2- 33 2.2.20 Mounting the Pickup Assembly..........................2- 35 2.2.21 Mounting the Pickup Assembly..........................
Page 10 Contents 2.5.1 Checking the Contents............................2- 56 2.5.2 Checking the Contents............................2- 56 2.5.3 Checking the Contents............................2- 57 2.5.4 Installing the Card Reader-D1 ..........................2- 57 2.5.5 Installing the Card Reader-D1 ..........................2- 61 2.5.6 Installing the Card Reader-D1 ..........................2- 64 2.5.7 Installing the Card Reader-D1 ..........................2- 67 2.6 Installing the NE Controller........................
Page 11 Contents 4.3.6 Construction of the System Software(iR105) ......................4- 11 4.3.7 E602 in Detaill ............................... 4- 11 4.4 Shut-Down Sequence..........................4- 17 4.4.1 Overview................................4- 17 4.4.2 Flow of Operation ..............................4- 17 4.5 Image Processing .............................4- 18 4.5.1 Outline(iR105) ............................... 4- 18 4.5.2 Overview of the Image Flow ..........................
Page 12 Contents 4.7.5.9 When Replacing the HDD..............................4- 33 4.7.6 Controller Fan ................................4- 33 4.7.6.1 Removing the Rear Cover ..............................4- 33 4.7.6.2 Removing the Rear Cover ..............................4- 34 4.7.6.3 Removing the Rear Cover ..............................4- 34 4.7.6.4 Removing the System Connector Cover..........................4- 34 4.7.6.5 Removing the Main Controller Box Cover..........................
Page 13 Contents 5.4.1.1 Removing the Reader Unit..............................5- 27 5.4.1.2 Sliding the Reader Unit ................................5- 27 5.4.2 CCD Unit ................................5- 27 5.4.2.1 Removing the CCD Unit................................. 5- 27 5.4.2.2 Removing the CCD Unit................................. 5- 28 5.4.2.3 Removing the CCD Unit................................. 5- 28 5.4.2.4 When Replacing the CCD Unit ..............................
Page 14 Contents 5.4.13.2 Removing the Original Size Sensor 1/2 ..........................5- 44 5.4.13.3 Removing the Original Size Sensor ............................. 5- 44 5.4.13.4 Removing the Original Size Sensor 3/4 ..........................5- 44 5.4.13.5 Removing the Original Size Sensor 3/4 ..........................5- 45 5.4.14 Scanner Home Position Sensor ...........................5- 45 5.4.14.1 Removing the HP Sensor..............................
Page 15 Contents 7.3.3 Controlling the Laser Scanner Motor........................7- 7 7.3.3.1 Outline...................................... 7- 7 7.4 Parts Replacement Procedure ........................7- 9 7.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit..............................7- 9 7.4.1.1 Removing the Laser Unit ................................. 7- 9 7.4.1.2 Removing the Laser Unit ................................. 7- 9 7.4.1.3 Removing the Laser Unit .................................
Page 16 Contents 8.6.1 Outline..................................8- 25 8.6.2 Controlling the Developing Assembly ........................8- 25 8.6.3 Controlling the Toner Cartridge Drive Mechanism....................8- 26 8.6.4 Controlling the Developing Bias..........................8- 27 8.6.5 Detecting the Toner Level and Controlling the Toner Supply Mechanism.............8- 28 8.7 Transfer Mechanism..........................8- 31 8.7.1 Transfer Guide Bias ...............................8- 31 8.7.1.1 Outline....................................
Page 17 Contents 8.9.12 Developing Cylinder Clutch ..........................8- 50 8.9.12.1 Remove the Developing Cylinder Clutch ..........................8- 50 8.9.12.2 Remove the Developing Cylinder Clutch ..........................8- 51 8.9.13 Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly......................8- 51 8.9.13.1 Removing the Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly ...................... 8- 51 8.9.14 Pre-Transfer Exposure LED ..........................
Page 18 Contents 9.4.2 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper ......................9- 21 9.4.3 Detecting the Level of Paper..........................9- 22 9.4.4 Cassette 3/4................................9- 23 9.4.5 Markings on the Width Guide Rail .........................9- 24 9.4.6 Paper Size ................................9- 24 9.5 Manual Feed Pickup Unit ......................... 9- 27 9.5.1 Pickup Operation ..............................9- 27 9.5.2 Detecting the Paper Size ............................9- 27 9.6 Deck .................................
Page 19 Contents 9.10.8.1 Removing the Feeding Roller............................... 9- 61 9.10.8.2 Orientation of the Feeding Roller ............................9- 61 9.10.8.3 Removing the Manual Feed Roller............................9- 61 9.10.8.4 Mounting the Manual Feed Roller ............................9- 62 9.10.9 Manual Separation Roller ............................ 9- 62 9.10.9.1 Removing the Separation Roller ............................
Page 20 Contents 10.1.4 Outline..................................10- 2 10.1.5 Major Components...............................10- 2 10.1.6 Fixing Drive System Outline..........................10- 3 10.1.7 Controlling the Fixing Roller Drive Mechanism ....................10- 4 10.1.8 Controlling the Cleaning Belt Drive Mechanism....................10- 5 10.1.9 Controlling the Thermistor Reciprocating Mechanism ..................10- 5 10.1.10 Controlling the Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating Mechanism..............10- 6 10.2 Basic Sequence............................
Page 21 Contents 10.5.8.2 Removing the Thermal Switch Unit............................ 10- 29 10.5.8.3 Mounting the Thermal Switch Unit ............................. 10- 29 10.5.8.4 Mounting the Thermal Switch Unit ............................. 10- 29 10.5.9 Fixing Heater ..............................10- 30 10.5.9.1 Removing the Main/Sub Heater ............................10- 30 10.5.9.2 Removing the Main/Sub Heater ............................
Page 22 Contents 11.4.3.1 Backup Battery................................... 11- 16 11.4.4 Energy-Saving Function.............................11- 16 11.4.4.1 Outline....................................11- 16 11.4.4.2 Outline....................................11- 17 11.4.4.3 Outline....................................11- 17 11.4.4.4 Outline....................................11- 18 11.4.4.5 Power Supply Mode ................................11- 18 11.4.4.6 Standby Mode (normal operation)............................11- 19 11.4.4.7 Power Save Mode................................
Page 23 Contents 11.5.18.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB ............................ 11- 36 11.5.18.3 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB.......................... 11- 36 11.5.18.4 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB.......................... 11- 36 11.5.19 Control Panel Controller PCB .......................... 11- 36 11.5.19.1 Removing the Control Panel Controller (CPU) PCB ......................11- 36 11.5.19.2 Removing the Control Panel Controller (CPU) PCB ......................
Page 24 Contents 11.5.38.1 Removing the Separation Fan (FM13) ..........................11- 48 11.5.38.2 Removing the Separation Fan (FM13) ..........................11- 49 11.5.39 Developing Fan ..............................11- 49 11.5.39.1 Removing the Developing Fan (FM15) ..........................11- 49 11.5.39.2 Removing the Developing Fan (FM15) ..........................11- 50 11.5.40 Delivery Anti-Adhesion Fan..........................11- 50 11.5.40.1 Removing the Delivery Anti-Adhesion Fan (FM17) ......................
Page 25 Contents Chapter 14 Standards and Adjustments 14.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure......................14- 1 14.1.1 Making Pre-Checks ............................. 14- 1 14.1.2 Making Pre-Checks ............................. 14- 1 14.1.3 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking the Images) ................14- 2 14.1.4 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking the Density Slope)..............14- 2 14.1.5 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking the Solid Black Density) .............
Page 26 Contents 14.7.2 Electrical Components Requiring Work After Replacement................14- 33 14.7.3 Electrical Parts Requiring Work After Replacement...................14- 33 14.7.4 When Replacing the HDD ..........................14- 33 14.7.5 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB ......................14- 33 14.7.6 Replacing the Main Controller PCB ........................14- 34 14.7.7 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB ......................14- 34 14.7.8 When Replacing the HV-DC PCB ........................14- 34 14.7.9 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB......................14- 35...
Page 27 Contents 14.8.33 Position of the Side Paper Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid ..............14- 67 14.8.34 Position of the Side Paper Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid ..............14- 67 14.8.35 Fitting the Side Guide Timing Belt of the Manual Feed Tray Assembly............14- 67 14.8.36 Attaching the Timing Belt for the Manual Feed Tray Assembly Side Guide ............
Page 28 Contents 15.3.1.1 Clutches ..................................... 15- 19 15.3.1.2 Clutches ..................................... 15- 20 15.3.1.3 Clutches ..................................... 15- 20 15.3.1.4 Solenoids ................................... 15- 21 15.3.1.5 Solenoids ................................... 15- 22 15.3.1.6 Solenoids ................................... 15- 23 15.3.2 Motor ..................................15- 24 15.3.2.1 Motors ....................................15- 24 15.3.2.2 Motors ....................................
Page 29 Contents 16.1.4 Error Code List..............................16- 3 16.1.5 Error Code List..............................16- 4 16.2 Error Code Details ..........................16- 6 16.2.1 Error Code Detail ..............................16- 6 16.2.2 Error Code Detail ............................... 16- 15 16.2.3 Error Code Detail ............................... 16- 24 16.2.4 E602 in Detaill..............................
Page 30 Contents 17.3.8 FEEDER................................17- 49 17.3.9 SORTER ................................17- 51 17.3.10 MN-CON(iR105)...............................17- 58 17.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) ........................ 17- 60 17.4.1 COPIER ................................17- 60 17.4.1.1 Copier List ..................................17- 60 17.4.1.2 Copier List ..................................17- 68 17.4.1.3 Copier List ..................................17- 75 17.4.1.4 Copier List ..................................
Page 31 Contents 17.8.1.4 Copier List ..................................17- 227 Chapter 18 Upgrading 18.1 Outline ..............................18- 1 18.1.1 Outline of Version upgrade ..........................18- 1 18.1.2 Outline of Version upgrade ..........................18- 1 18.1.3 Outline of the Service Support Tool........................18- 1 18.2 Making Preparations ..........................18- 5 18.2.1 Registering the Firmware.............................
Page 32 Contents...
Page 33: Chapter 1 Introduction
Chapter 1 Introduction...
Page 35 Contents Contents 1.1 System Construction ..............................1-1 1.1.1 System Configuration .................................. 1-1 1.1.2 System Configuration .................................. 1-1 1.1.3 System Configuration .................................. 1-2 1.1.4 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration......................1-3 1.1.5 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration......................1-4 1.1.6 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration......................1-5 1.2 Product Specifications..............................1-7 1.2.1 Features ......................................
Page 36 Contents 1.2.4.11 System Settings......................................1-38 1.2.4.12 Network Settings (in "System Settings")..............................1-39 1.2.4.13 Copy Settings ......................................1-42 1.2.4.14 Copy Settings ......................................1-43 1.2.4.15 Communications Settings ................................... 1-43 1.2.4.16 Mail Box Settings ....................................... 1-44 1.2.4.17 Address Book Settings....................................1-44 1.2.5 Safety ......................................1-44 1.2.5.1 Safety of Laser Light ....................................
Page 37: System Construction
Chapter 1 1.1 System Construction 1.1.1 System Configuration 0006-9204 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 This machine may be configured with the following options: [15] [16] [19] [20] [13] [12] [14] [11] [17] [10] [18] F-1-1 T-1-1 Saddle Finisher-K3/K3N/K4/K4N [11] Puncher Unit-E1/F1 Inserter-B1 [12] Stapler-G1/H1 Paper Folding Unit-C1...
Page 38: System Configuration
Chapter 1 [15] [16] [19] [20] [13] [12] [14] [11] [17] [10] [18] F-1-2 T-1-2 Saddle Finisher-K3/K3N/K4/K4N [11] Puncher Unit-E1/F1 Inserter-B1 [12] Stapler-G1/H1 Paper Folding Unit-C1 [13] Stapler Cartridge-H1 Main body [14] Card Reader-D1 Side Paper Deck-M1 [15] Original Holder-D1 Side Paper Deck-T1 [16] Copy Tray Unit-G1...
Page 39: Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration
Chapter 1 [17] [13] [18] [15] [16] [11] [10] [12] [19] [14] F-1-3 T-1-3 Saddle Finisher-K3/K3N/K4/K4N [10] Staple-G1/H1 Inserter-B1 [11] Staple Cartridge-H1 Paper Folding Unit-C1 [12] Card Reader-D1 Main body [13] Copy Tray Unit-G1 Side Paper Deck-M1 [14] FL Cassette-P4 Side Paper Deck-S1/T1 [15] NE Controller-A1/Copy Data Controller-B1/B2/...
Page 40: Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration
Chapter 1 [4]-[7] F-1-4 [1] USB Application Interface Board-D1 [2] Expansion Bus-A1 [3] Multi-PDL Printer Kit-F1 (N-Boot) [4] iR Security Kit-A2 (License) [5] Universal Send PDF Enhancement Kit-B1 (License) [6] Universal Send Seachable PDF Kit-A1 (License) [7] Universal Send Kit-C1 (License) 1.1.5 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration 0008-8629 iR85+...
Page 41: Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration
Chapter 1 F-1-5 [1] USB Application Interface Board-D1 [2] Expansion Bus-A1 [3] Multi-PDL Printer Kit-F1 (N-Boot) [4] iR Security Kit-A2 (License) 1.1.6 Printing/Transmitting Accessories System Configuration 0008-7317 iR8070 The following is a diagram of the system configuration:...
Page 42 Chapter 1 [4]-[7] F-1-6 [1] USB Application Interface Board-D1 [2] Expansion Bus-A1 [3] Multi-PDL Printer Kit-F1 (N-Boot) [4] iR Security Kit-A2 (License) [5] Universal Send PDF Enhancement Kit-B1 (License) [6] Universal Send Seachable PDF Kit-A1 (License) [7] Universal Send Kit-C1 (License)
Page 43: Product Specifications
Chapter 1 1.2 Product Specifications 1.2.1 Features 1.2.1.1 High Speed, High Quality 0006-9353 iR105i/iR105+ - The use of a high-speed engine based on a twin-laser exposure technology promises high-speed operation and high-quality image reproduction. - The CCD is a 4-channel CCD. - Operating Speed: 105 copies/min (A4/LTR, 1-to-N;...
Page 44: Various Delivery Processing (With Options)
Chapter 1 * If paper of 64 g/m2. 1.2.1.9 Large-Capacity Paper Source 0008-6825 / iR85+ / iR8070 - With the addition of the Side Paper Deck-M1 (option), up to 7650 sheets of paper (80 g/m2) may be accommodated for immediate use: Right deck: 1500 sheets <1700 sheets>* Left deck: 1500 sheets <1700 sheets>* Cassette 3: 550 sheets <600 sheets>*...
Page 45: High-Level Printer Functions To Support Networking Requirements(Ir105)
Chapter 1 Stapler cartridge (standard with finisher) 50-sheet stapling: Stapler-H1 Stapler Cartridge -H1 b. Saddle Stitching - A sheet of paper may be stapled in the middle, folded, and delivered (with a Saddle Finisher-K3/K3N/K4/K4N in use). c. Punching - A sheet of paper may be punched to open 2, 3, or 4 holes and delivered (with a Finisher-K2/K2N or Saddle Finisher-K3/K3N/K3/K4N, and Puncher Unit- E1/F1 in use).
Page 46 Chapter 1 [13] [10] [11] [12] F-1-7 T-1-6 Waste toner box cover Original delivery tray Right deck Main power switch [10] Left deck Control panel power switch [11] Cassette 3 Manual feed tray [12] Cassette 4 Vertical path cover (upper) [13] Front cover Vertical path cover (lower)
Page 47: External View
Chapter 1 Control panel Delivery cover Grip/drum rotation stopper case Heater switch Service Book Case Leakage breaker Feeding assembly releasing lever 1.2.2.2 External View 0008-8630 iR85+ [12] [10] [11] F-1-9 T-1-8 Top panel Waste toner case cover Control panel power switch Right deck Main power switch Left deck...
Page 48 Chapter 1 [12] [10] [11] F-1-10 T-1-9 Waste toner box cover Main power switch Right deck Control panel power switch Left deck Manual feed tray [10] Cassette 3 Right upper cover [11] Cassette 4 Right lower cover [12] Front cover Detailed view of [8] and [9] F-1-11 1-12...
Page 49: Cross Section
Chapter 1 T-1-10 Copyboard glass Cover switch assembly Control panel Delivery cover Grip/drum rotation stopper case Heater switch Service Book Case Leakage breaker Feeding assembly releasing lever 1.2.2.4 Cross Section 0006-9421 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [44] [43] [14]...
Page 50: Cross Section
Chapter 1 Drum cleaner assembly [30] Cassette 3 separation roller Photosensitive drum [31] Cassette 4 pickup roller [10] Primary charging assembly [32] Cassette 4 feeding roller [11] CCD unit [33] Cassette 4 separation roller [12] Bending mirror [34] Cassette 4 [13] Toner cartridge [35]...
Page 51: Cross Section
Chapter 1 T-1-12 Fixing assembly [20] Right deck pickup roller Fixing web [21] Right deck feeding roller Laser unit [22] Right deck separation roller Feeding assembly [23] Right deck Drum cleaner assembly [24] Cassette 3 pickup roller Photosensitive drum [25] Cassette 3 feeding roller Primary charging assembly [26]...
Page 52 Chapter 1 [3] [4] [7] [8] [9] [10] [11] [12] [13] [44] [43] [14] [15] [16] [17] [42] [41] [18] [19] [40] [20] [21] [22] [23] [24] [25] [39] [26] [38] [37] [36] [27] [28] [29] [30] [35] [31] [32] [33] [34] F-1-14...
Page 53: External Covers
Chapter 1 [19] Manual feed separation roller [41] Fixing upper roller [20] Pre-transfer exposure LED [42] External delivery roller [21] Registration roller [43] No.3 mirror [22] Transfer charging assembly [44] No.2 mirror 1.2.2.7 External Covers 0008-0905 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 [11] [10] F-1-15 [1] Upper front cover...
Page 54 Chapter 1 [12] Right glass retainer (2 screws) [13] Scanning lamp cover [14] Control panel [15] Upper right cover [16] Right rear cover [17] Waste toner cover (1 screw) [18] Right lower cover (2 screws) [19] Upper vertical path cover [20] Manual feed tray unit [21] Face plate cover [22]...
Page 55: External Covers
Chapter 1 [39] [43] [42] [41] [40] F-1-19 [39] ADF [40] Right deck [41] Cassette 4 [42] Cassette 3 [43] Left deck 1.2.2.8 External Covers 0008-8220 Those covers that can be detached by mere removal of mounting screws are omitted from the discussions (number of screws indicated). [14] [13] [12]...
Page 56 Chapter 1 [17] [16] [18] [19] [15] [20] [21] [23] [22] F-1-21 [15] Inside upper cover [16] Primary assembly cover (1 screw) [17] Process unit cover (4 screws) [18] Pre-transfer charging assembly cover (1 screw) [19] Compartment cover [20] Inside right lower cover (2 screws; 1 screw used in common with front cover tape) [21] Transfer/saparation charging assembly cover (1 screw) [22] Duplex unit cover (4 screws, 3 knobs) [23] Fixing/feeder unit cover...
Page 57: External Covers
Chapter 1 [33] [34] [35] [32] [36] [31] [40] [39] [37] [38] F-1-23 [31] Left pocket plate [32] Upper rear cover [33] Right pocket plate (3 screws) [34] Right glass retainer (2 screws) [35] Original delivery tray (2 screws) [36] Upper front cover [37] Scanning lamp cover [38] Copyboard glass [39] Left glass retainer (2 screws)
Page 58 Chapter 1 [17] [16] [18] [19] [15] [20] [21] [23] [22] F-1-25 [15] Inside upper cover [16] Primary assembly cover (1 screw) [17] Process unit cover (4 screws) [18] Pre-transfer charging assembly cover (1 screw) [19] Compartment cover [20] Inside right lower cover (2 screws; 1 screw used in common with front cover tape) [21] Transfer/saparation charging assembly cover (1 screw) [22] Duplex unit cover (4 screws, 3 knobs) [23] Fixing/feeder unit cover...
Page 59: Using The Machine
Chapter 1 [31] [32] [30] [33] [34] [37] [36] [35] F-1-27 [30] Left pocket cover (reader rear cover removed; ADF positioning stepped screw, 1 pc.) [31] Right pocket cover (reader rear cover removed; ADF positioning stepped screw 1 pc.) [32] Reader right cover (2 screws) [33] Cartridge upper cover [34] Reader front cover (2 screws) [35] Reader left cover (2 screws)
Page 60: Power Switch
Chapter 1 Counter Check Guide Reset Stop Additional Start Functions ON/OFF Display Energy Contrast Saver Clear Power Processing/ Data Error F-1-29 [1] Control panel power switch [2] Main power lamp [3] Main power switch Do not turn off the main power while the progress bar is displayed, indicating that the HDD is being accessed. Otherwise, the HDD can suffer a fault (E602).
Page 61: Power Switch
Chapter 1 The machine is equipped with two power switches: main power switch and control panel power switch. It is turned on when the main power switch is turned on; to end power save mode, low power mode, or sleep mode, turn on the control panel power switch. F-1-31 [1] Control panel power switch [2] Main power lamp...
Page 62: Points To Note When Turning Off The Main Power Switch
Chapter 1 The machine is equipped with two power switches: main power switch and control panel power switch. It is turned on when the main power switch is turned on; to end power save mode, low power mode, or sleep mode, turn on the control panel power switch. F-1-33 [1] Control panel power switch [2] Main power lamp...
Page 63: Points To Note When Turning Off The Main Power Switch
Chapter 1 4. Take care as some components remain powered even when the front cover is opened as long as the main power switch remains on. Counter Check Guide Reset Stop Additional Start Functions ON/OFF Display Energy Contrast Saver Clear Power Processing/ Data...
Page 64: Points To Note When Turning Off The Main Power Switch
Chapter 1 F-1-36 [1] Control panel power switch [2] Operation/Memory lamp [3] Main power switch [4] Heater switch 1.2.3.6 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch 0008-7339 / iR8070 Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch Be sure always to turn off the control panel power switch before turning off the main power switch;...
Page 65: Control Panel
Chapter 1 F-1-37 [1] Control panel power switch [2] Operation/Memory lamp [3] Main power switch [4] Heater switch 1.2.3.7 Control Panel 0006-9426 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 [16] Counter Check Help Reset Stop Additional Start Functions ON/OFF Display Energy Contrast Saver Clear Power Processing/ Error...
Page 66: Control Panel
Chapter 1 Stop key [13] Help key Start key [14] Image contrast dial Error lamp [15] Counter Check key * Operation/Memory lamp [16] Touch panel display * Indicates the readings of counters on the touch panel display. 1.2.3.8 Control Panel 0008-8638 iR85+ Energy Save...
Page 67: Extension Mode Items
Chapter 1 T-1-16 Counter Check key * [10] Keypad Image contrast dial [11] Operation/Memory lamp Power Save key [12] ID key Control panel power switch [13] Interrupt key Stop key [14] User Mode key Main power lamp [15] Help key Start key [16] Reset key...
Page 68: User Mode Items
Chapter 1 Item Description Index Paper Use it when inserting an index sheet/when printing in the index area of an index sheet. Mode Memory Use it to store or call a copying mode (9 settings max.). Call Use it to call back any of the three most recent copying modes for printing.
Page 69: Common Settings
Chapter 1 Main item Intermediate item Standard Local Print Settings Paper Select: Auto*/Select Paper Supply Copies: 1* to 9,999 sets Finisher: With the Finisher-K1N- Do Not Collate/Collate/Offset Collate*/Group/Offset Group/Staple (Corner (Top Left/Bottom Left/Top Right/Bottom Right), Double (Left/Right)) With the Finisher-K2N, Saddle Finisher-K3N- Do Not Collate/Collate/Offset Collate*/Group/Offset Group/ Staple (Corner (Top Left/Bottom Left/Top Right/Bottom Right), Double (Left/Right))/Hole Punch With the Saddle Finisher-K3N + Paper Folding Unit-C1-...
Page 70: Common Settings
Chapter 1 Main item Intermediate item Register Form for Form Transparent Image)/Erase/Check Print/Details Composition Register Characters for Page Register/Edit, Erase No./Watermark Stack Bypass Standard On/Off* Settings Standard Local Print Settings Paper Select: Auto*/Select Paper Supply Prints: 1* to 2,000 sets Finisher: With the Finisher-K1N- Do Not Collate/Collate/Offset Collate*/Group/Offset Group/Staple (Corner (Top...
Page 71: Timer Settings
Chapter 1 Main item Intermediate item Register Paper Type Paper drawer (1, 2), Paper Deck: Plain*/Recycled/Color/Letterhead/Bond/3-Hole Punch/Heavy Paper drawer (3, 4): Plain*/Recycled/Color/Letterhead/Bond/3-Hole Punch/Heavy/ Tab Paper Energy Saver Mode -10%*/-25%/-50%/None Energy Consumption in Sleep Low*/High Mode LTRR/STMT Original Distinguish Manually/Use LTRR Format*/Use STMT Format Selection Tray Designation Tray A: Copy*/Printer*/Mail Box*/Receive*/Other*...
Page 72: Report Settings
Chapter 1 MEMO: The items associated with the printer are indicated when the printer functions are installed. T-1-22 Main item Intermediate item Zoom Fine Adjustment X/Y: 0*, -1.0% to +1.0% in 0.1% increments Saddle Stitcher Staple Repositioning Press [Start] Saddle Stitch Position Adjustment -2.0 mm to +2.0 mm (0 mm*) in 0.25 mm increments Double Staple Space Adjustment 2-3/4"...
Page 73: Copy Settings
Chapter 1 1.2.4.8 Report Settings 0008-9191 iR85+ T-1-25 Main item Intermediate item Print List Network Printer 1.2.4.9 Copy Settings 0008-8650 iR85+ T-1-26 Main item Intermediate item Image Orientation Priority On/Off* Auto Orientation On*/Off *: Factory default. 1.2.4.10 System Settings 0006-9460 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 MEMO: The items associated with the printer are indicated when the printer functions are installed.
Page 74: System Settings
Chapter 1 Main item Intermediate item Auto Online/Offline Auto Online: On/Off* Auto Offline: On/Off* Date & Time Settings Default Setting (12-digit number) Time Zone: GMT-12:00 to GMT+12:00, (GMT-05:00*) Daylight Saving Time: On*/Off, Between 2:00 a.m. on the first Sunday of April and 2:00 a.m.
Page 75: Network Settings (In "System Settings")
DNS Server Settings Primary Server (DNS): IP Address (0.0.0.0*) Secondary Server (DNS): IP Address (0.0.0.0*) Host Name: 47 Characters maximum (CANON******) "******" represents the last six digits of a MAC address* Domain Name: 47 Characters maximum DNS Dynamic Update: On/Off* PING Command PING Command: IP Address (0.0.0.0*)
Page 76 Chapter 1 Main item: IP Address Settings Intermediate item IPP Settings IPP Settings: On*/Off Use SSL: On/Off* Use Authentication: On/Off* User: User name for IPP authentication (24 Characters maximum) Password: Password for IPP authentication (24 Characters maximum) Multicast Discovery Response: On*/Off Scope Name: Scope name to use when performing a multicast discovery from utilities (32 Characters maximum) (default*) Certificate Settings:...
Page 77 Chapter 1 Main item: NetWare Settings Intermediate item Bindery PServer Print Server: 47 Characters maximum Settings File Server: 47 Characters maximum Print Server Password: 20 Characters maximum Service Mode: Service only currently mounted form/Change forms as needed/Minimize form changes across print queues/Minimize form changeswithin print queues* Printer Number: 0 to 15 (0*) Polling Interval: 1 to 15 seconds (5*) Printer Form: 0 to 255 (0*)
Page 78: Copy Settings
Chapter 1 T-1-35 Main item: Spool Settings Intermediate item Use Spooler On/Off* *: Factory default. T-1-36 Main item: Startup Time Settings Intermediate item Startup Time Settings 0 to 300 seconds (60*) *: Factory default. T-1-37 Main item: Ethernet Driver Settings Intermediate item Auto Detect On*/Off...
Page 79: Communications Settings
Chapter 1 Main item Intermediate item Auto Collate On*/Off Image Orientation Priority On/Off* Auto Orientation On*/Off Photo Mode On/Off* Smart Scan Initial Setting: On*/Off Change Original Type: On/Off* Recognizable Text: Japanese/European/Russian* Standard Settings Store, Initialize Store Remote Device Store (Max 7 printers), Details, Erase, Move To Top Remote Device Transmission Timeout 5 to 30 seconds, 10 seconds* Initialize Copy Settings...
Page 80: Mail Box Settings
Chapter 1 Main item Intermediate item Retry Times 0 to 5 times (3 times*) Edit Standard Send Scanning Mode, File Format, Stamp, Divide into Pages Settings Store Favorites Button Store/Edit, Erase (8 combinations) PDF (OCR) Settings Smart Scan: On*, Off Number of Characters for Document Name Setting: 1 to 24 characters;...
Page 81: Cdrh Ordinances
The following is the label that indicates compliance with the CDRH ordinances, and it must be found on all laser products sold in the US. CANON 30-2, SHIMOMARUKO, 3-CHOME, OHTAKU, TOKYO, 146, JAPAN.
Page 82: Cdrh Ordinances
Chapter 1 CANON 30-2, SHIMOMARUKO, 3-CHOME, OHTAKU, TOKYO, 146, JAPAN. MANUFACTURED: THIS PRODUCT CONFORMS WITH CQRH RADIATION PERFORMANCE STANDARD 21CFR CHAPTER 1 SUBCHAPTER J. F-1-42 The description may vary from model to model. 1.2.5.4 CDRH Ordinances 0008-7357 / iR8070 The Center for Devices and Radiological Health (CDRH) of the US Food and Drum Administration put into force ordinances related to laser products on August 2, 1976.
Page 83: Handling The Laser System
Chapter 1 Take such precautions as removing the watch and rings before starting the work (to prevent reflection of laser light to the eye). The machine's laser light is red, and covers that can reflect laser light are identified by the following label.
Page 84: Handling The Laser System
Chapter 1 This label is attached to all covers inside the machine where hazards from laser light exist. DANGER- Laser radiation when open. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. FS6-8820 DANGER- Laser radiation when open and interlock defeated. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
Page 85: Safety Of Toner
Chapter 1 DANGER- Laser radiation when open. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. FS6-8820 DANGER- Laser radiation when open and interlock defeated. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. DANGER- Laser radiation when open. AVOID DIRECT EXPOSURE TO BEAM. FS6-8820 F-1-46 1.2.5.8 Safety of Toner 0006-9350 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 The machine's toner is a non-toxic product consisting of plastic, iron, and small amounts...
Page 86 Chapter 1 Exposure method Twin laser unit Copy density adjustment Auto, or manual (9 settings) function Development method Dry, 1-component toner projection Pickup method - Paper deck (2 cassettes; right deck, left deck) - Cassette (2 cassettes; cassette 3, caste 4) - Manual feed tray (5.5 mm deep, approx.;...
Page 87: Sepecifications
Chapter 1 Sleep mode Yes (60 min standard; may be changed in user mode: 10, 15, 20, 30, 40, 50, 60, 90 min; 2, 3, 4 hr) Energy save mode Yes (-10 % standard; may be changed in user mode: -10 %, -25 %, -50 %, 0 % no recovery time) Option See "System configuration".
Page 88: Sepecifications
Chapter 1 Non-image width (left/right) Direct/R-E: 2.5 -/+1.5 mm (when an ADF is used: 2.5 -/+1.8 Image margin (leading edge) Direct/R-E: 4.0 + 1.5/-1.0 mm (when an ADF is used: 4.0 -/ +1.5/-1.0 mm) Image margin (trailing edge) Direct/R-E: (one-sided) 2.5 -/+1.5 mm (when an ADF is used: 2.5 -/+1.5 mm) Direct/R-E: (two-sided) 2.5 -/+2.0 mm (when an ADF is used: 2.5 -/+2.0 mm) Image margin (left/right)
Page 89 Chapter 1 Fixing method Heat roller 100 V: 800 W (main) + 250 W (sub) 208 V: 900 W (main) + 600 W (sub) 230 V: 900 W (main) + 600 W (sub) Counter Soft counter Toner type Magnetic, positive toner (toner cartridge) Original type Sheet, book, 3-D object (2 kg max.) Maximum original size...
Page 90: Function List
Chapter 1 Operating environment 810.6 to 1013.3 hpa (0.8 to 1.0 atm) (atmospheric pressure) Power supply rating 100 V/15 A (50/60 Hz) 208 V/12 A (60 Hz) 230 V/13 A (50 Hz) Power consumption 100V: 1.5 kw or less, 208V/230V: 2.7 kw or less (maximum) Noise In operation 81 dB or less In standby 59.5 dB or less...
Page 91: Print Speed
Chapter 1 - Inch Enlargement/reduction Size Paper size Copies/min (1-to-N) Direct 279.4 x 431.8 mm 279.4 x (11 x 17) 431.8 mm (11 x 17) 105 (100) LTRR LTRR STMTR STMTR Reduce II (50.0 %) 279.4 x 431.8 mm STMTR (11 x 17) ->...
Page 92 Chapter 1 T-1-47 - AB Enlargement/reduction Size Paper size Copies/min (1-to-N) Direct A3 (297 x 420 mm) A4 (210 x 297 mm) B4 (257 x 364 mm) B5 (182 x 257 mm) A4R (297 x 210 mm) A4R B5R (257 x 182 mm) B5R A5R (210 x 148 mm) A5R Reduce II (50.0 %)
Page 93: Print Speed
Chapter 1 Enlargement/reduction Size Paper size Copies/min (1-to-N) Enlarge III (200.0 STMTR* -> 279.4 x 279.4 x 431.8 mm 431.8 mm (11 x 17) (11 x 17) II (129.4 %) LTRR -> 279.4 x 279.4 x 431.8 mm 431.8 mm (11 x 17) (11 x 17) I (121.4 %) LGL ->...
Page 94: Paper Type
Chapter 1 - Inch Enlargement/reduction Size Paper size Copies/min (1-to-N) Direct 279.4 x 431.8 mm 279.4 x (11 x 17) 431.8 mm (11 x 17) LTRR LTRR STMTR STMTR Reduce II (50.0 %) 279.4 x 431.8 mm STMTR (11 x 17) -> STMTR III (64.7 %) 279.4 x 431.8 mm LTRR (11 x 17) ->...
Page 95 Chapter 1 Item Description Cassette 3 pick up - Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2) Cassette 4 pick up A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, A5R, 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR - Recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2) A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, A5R, 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMTR - Eco paper (80 g/m2)
Page 96 Chapter 1 Item Description Single-sided mode - Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2) A3, B4, A4, B5, A5, A4R, B5R, A5R, 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (vertical feed) - Recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2) A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, A5R, 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (vertical feed)
Page 97 Chapter 1 Item Description Double-sided Auto mode - Plain paper (64 to 80 g/m2) A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, A5R, 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (vertical feed) - Recycled paper (64 to 80 g/m2) A3, B4, A4, B5, A4R, B5R, A5R, 279.4 x 431.8 mm (11 x 17), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (vertical feed)
Page 99: Chapter 2 Installation
Chapter 2 Installation...
Page 101 Contents Contents 2.1 Making Pre-Checks................................2-1 2.1.1 Selecting the site ..................................2-1 2.1.2 Selecting the site ..................................2-2 2.1.3 Selecting the site ..................................2-4 2.1.4 Selecting the site ..................................2-6 2.1.5 Points to Note Before Starting the Work ............................. 2-8 2.1.6 Points to Note Before Starting the Work ............................. 2-8 2.1.7 Points to Note Before Starting the Installation Work ........................
Page 102 Contents 2.2.37 Other attachment..................................2-42 2.2.38 Other attachment..................................2-42 2.2.39 Attaching the Labels, Setting Paper, Checking Images/Operations, and User Mode.............. 2-43 2.2.40 Attaching the Labels, Setting Paper, Checking Images/Operations, and User Mode.............. 2-44 2.2.41 Attaching the Labels, Setting Paper, Checking Images/Operations, and User Mode.............. 2-45 2.2.42 Attaching the Labels, Setting Paper, Checking Images/Operations, and User Mode..............
Page 103: Making Pre-Checks
Chapter 2 2.1 Making Pre-Checks 2.1.1 Selecting the site 0008-8679 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 The site of installation must meet the following requirements; if possible, visit the user's before delivery of the machine: 1) The site must provide with a power outlet that is rated to suit the machine and that can be used exclusively by the machine; 200V Model (180 to 220V, 15A or more), 208V Model (188 to 228V, 12A or more), 230V Model (198 to 264V, 13A or more).
Page 104: Selecting The Site
Chapter 2 MEMO: In general, the silicon gas (vapor of silicone oil from the fixing assembly) tends to soil the corona charging wire, reducing its life. This is particularly true of a low humidity environment.) Wrong 2 F-2-3 Outline of the Work Space Use the following as a guide when considering space for service work: - Copier + Finisher 10 cm min.
Page 105 Chapter 2 (%RH) (degC) 27.5 32.5 F-2-6 <Guaranteed Environment Zone> [A] Zone A: All items of the Quality Standard are satisfied. [B] Zone B: In the Quality Standard, there are items that are inferior to Zone A or not satisfied. [C] Zone C: There are no safety problems, no malfunctions, and no improper indications.
Page 106: Selecting The Site
Chapter 2 Wrong 2 F-2-8 Outline of the Work Space Use the following as a guide when considering space for service work: - Copier + Finisher 10 cm min. 50 cm min. Copier 120 cm min. 250 cm min. F-2-9 - Copier + Finisher + Side Paper Deck 10 cm min.
Page 107 Chapter 2 (%RH) (degC) 27.5 32.5 F-2-11 <Guaranteed Environment Zone> [A] Zone A: All items of the Quality Standard are satisfied. [B] Zone B: In the Quality Standard, there are items that are inferior to Zone A or not satisfied. [C] Zone C: There are no safety problems, no malfunctions, and no improper indications.
Page 108: Selecting The Site
Chapter 2 Wrong 2 F-2-13 Outline of the Work Space Use the following as a guide when considering space for service work: - Copier + Finisher 10 cm min. 50 cm min. Copier 120 cm min. 250 cm min. F-2-14 - Copier + Finisher + Side Paper Deck 10 cm min.
Page 109 Chapter 2 (%RH) (degC) 27.5 32.5 F-2-16 <Guaranteed Environment Zone> [A] Zone A: All items of the Quality Standard are satisfied. [B] Zone B: In the Quality Standard, there are items that are inferior to Zone A or not satisfied. [C] Zone C: There are no safety problems, no malfunctions, and no improper indications.
Page 110: Points To Note Before Starting The Work
Chapter 2 Wrong 2 F-2-18 Outline of the Work Space Use the following as a guide when considering space for service work: - Main body + Finisher 10 cm min. 50 cm min. Main body 120 cm min. 250 cm min. F-2-19 - Main body + Finisher + Side Paper Deck 10 cm min.
Page 111: Points To Note Before Starting The Installation Work
Chapter 2 Go through the following before starting to install the machine: 1) If the machine is moved from a cold to warm place, it can develop condensation in the form of droplets of water on its metal surfaces. Use of the machine while it suffers from condensation can lead to image faults. If the machine has been moved from a cold to warm place, be sure to leave it for 1 hour or more without unpacking so that it becomes fully used to the new place.
Page 112: Checking The Components
Chapter 2 Size label(Cassette/Deck) 2 PC.* Size plate 2 PC. Grip 1 PC. Non-Inch tab 4 PC. Toner (Italiann only) 1 PC. Document Tray (USA only) 1 PC. Index paper attachment 1 PC. Lining sheet [10] 1 PC. One-touch support [11] 2 PC.
Page 113: Checking The Components
Chapter 2 [24] LIPS LX Driver/Utility CD-ROM 1 pc. 1 pc. [25] LIPS V Driver/Utlity CD [26] NW ScanGear CD 1 pc. LIPS Printer Guide [27] 1 pc. Remote UI Guide [28] 1 pc. Network Guide [29] 1 pc. [30] Emulation Manual CD 1 pc.
Page 114: Checking The Components
Chapter 2 Network Guide [21] 1 PC. MEAP Administration Software CD [22] 1 PC. MEAP Application Control Function Guide [23] 1 PC. MEAP Authentication System Setup Guide [24] 1 PC. BM Links (sheet) [25] 1 PC. QR Sheet [26] 1 PC. Service Book [27] 1 PC.
Page 115: Unpacking And Installation
Chapter 2 2.2 Unpacking and Installation 2.2.1 Unpacking 0007-6543 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Unpack the copier. Open the plastic bag. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the top of the grip cover [1] (2 pc.) on the left side of the machine, and detach the cover. Shift up the grips [2].
Page 116 Chapter 2 F-2-27 8) Take out the 2 slope plates [2] from the middle of the skid [1]. F-2-29 10) Take out the parts and attachments from the cardboard box that comes with the machine; then, check to make sure that none of the foregoing items is missing.
Page 117: Unpacking
Chapter 2 F-2-31 F-2-33 13) Mount the removed face covers to the right and left sides. 3) Take out the grip [1] from the box that comes with the machine. Open the right upper cover, and mount the small and large face covers. Close the right upper cover.
Page 118 Chapter 2 F-2-36 6) Holding the grips on the delivery side (front, rear) of the machine, lift F-2-39 the machine slightly to remove the remaining pad [1] and the plastic bag at the same time. 9) Remove the 2 pins [2] taped in place to the slope plate [1]. Turn over the slope plate [1], and fit the pin [2] (1 pc.
Page 119: Mounting The Scanner System
Chapter 2 2.2.3 Mounting the Scanner System 0007-6604 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Remove the packing tape from the copier. 2) Open the ADF. Remove the copyboard glass protective pad. 3) Remove the packing tape [1] from the scanner fixing. Slide the scanner fixing [2] to the front to detach. (Store away the fixing, as you will need it to secure the scanner when relocating the machine.) F-2-43...
Page 120 Chapter 2 F-2-45 3) Take out the grip [1] from the box that comes with the machine. F-2-48 6) Holding the grips on the delivery side (front, rear) of the copier, lift the machine slightly to remove the remaining pad [1] and the plastic bag at the same time.
Page 121 Chapter 2 F-2-51 9) Remove the 2 pins [2] taped in place to the slope plate [1]. Turn over the slope plate [1], and fit the pin [2] (1 pc. each) while matching the pin holes in the skid and the pin hole in the slope plate. Holding the grips (front, rear) on the delivery side of the copier, slide the machine along the slope plates, then off the skid.
Page 122: Unpacking
Chapter 2 2.2.5 Unpacking 0007-2893 1) Unpack the copier. Open the plastic bag. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the top of the grip cover [1] (2 pc.) on the left side of the machine, and detach the cover. Shift up the grips [2]. F-2-58 5) Holding the grips on the pickup side (front, rear) for the copier, lift the machine slightly to remove the pad [1].
Page 123 Chapter 2 F-2-61 8) Take out the 2 slope plates [2] from the middle of the skid [1]. F-2-63 10) Take out the parts and attachments from the cardboard box that comes with the machine; then, check to make sure that none of the foregoing items is missing.
Page 124: Installing The Fixing Assembly
Chapter 2 Remove all foreign matter (e.g., tape glue) from the feed belt. F-2-65 13) Mount the removed face covers to the right and left sides. Open the right upper cover, and mount the small and large face covers. Close the right upper cover. If condensation is found on the outside or inside of the machine after unpacking, stop the work before moving to the next step so that the F-2-68...
Page 125: Mounting The Scanner System
Chapter 2 F-2-73 6) Remove the tape used to keep the tag in place, and open the top [1] of the fixing/ feeding assembly; then, remove the 2 fixing nip releasing F-2-70 screws [2] at the front and rear. 3) Shift down the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever [1] in the direction of the arrow (left) to unlock the transfer/separation charging assembly.
Page 126: Mounting The Charging Assembly
Chapter 2 1) Remove the packing tape from the copier. 2) Open the ADF. Remove the copyboard glass protective padding. 3) Remove the tape [1], and slide the scanner fixing [2] toward the front to detach (Store away the fixing screw for possible relocation of the machine in the future).
Page 127: Mounting The Fixing Assembly
Chapter 2 7) Remove the screw [1], and detach the primary charging assembly front cover [2]. F-2-83 F-2-86 8) Disconnect the connector [1], and release the locking lever [3] of the primary charging assembly [2]; then, take out the primary charging 11) With the lock released, slide in the primary charging assembly, and assembly.
Page 128: Mounting The Fixing Assembly
Chapter 2 F-2-88 F-2-91 3) Slide out the fixing/feeding unit [1] toward the front. Close the top of the fixing/feeding unit. 2.2.12 Mounting the Fixing Assembly 0007-2900 1) Open the front cover. 2) Shift down the fixing/feeding assembly releasing lever [1] in the direction of the arrow (left) to unlock the transfer/separation charging assembly.
Page 129: Checking The Developing Assembly
Chapter 2 F-2-97 5) Secure the developing assembly locking unit [1] with the 6 TP screws [2] (M4x6; black) that come with the machine. F-2-94 5) Remove the tape used to keep the tag in place, and open the top [1] of the fixing/ feeding assembly;...
Page 130 Chapter 2 F-2-103 F-2-100 2) Remove the fixing [1] (1 screw [2]), and disconnect the connector [3]. F-2-104 5) Connect the connector of the transfer/ separation charging assembly, and mount the fixing. 6) Using a screw, mount the toner/separation charging assembly front cover.
Page 131: Mounting The Charging Assembly
Chapter 2 Check to make sure that the solvent is fully dry. 12) With the lock released, slide in the pretransfer charging assembly, and connect the connector. F-2-107 F-2-110 Do not start mounting work before the solvent has become completely dry.
Page 132 Chapter 2 Using alcohol, clean the transfer/ separation charging wire. F-2-116 F-2-113 7) Remove the screw [1], and detach the primary charging assembly 4) While keeping the following in mind, mount the transfer/separation front cover [2]. charging assembly: - The solvent must completely be dry. - The gut wire must not be brought into contact with the transfer guide [1] to avoid a cut.
Page 133: Mounting The Pickup Assembly
Chapter 2 charging assembly cover with a screw (1 pc. each). 14) Close the front cover. 2.2.16 Mounting the Pickup Assembly 0007-6647 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Shift down the lever [1] in the direction of the arrow, and remove the pickup roller releasing spacer [2].
Page 134: Checking The Developing Assembly
Chapter 2 F-2-127 F-2-124 2.2.17 Checking the Developing Assembly 0007-3391 Check to make sure that the developing assembly locking unit is firmly / iR85+ in contact; otherwise, image faults can occur (In particular, be sure it is not riding over the boss at the bottom). 1) Open the manual feed tray unit.
Page 135: Mounting The Control Panel
Chapter 2 with the plate of the developing assembly base. 4) Connect the 2 connectors [2]. F-2-130 5) Secure the developing assembly locking unit [1] in place using the 6 TP screws [2] (M4X6; black). F-2-133 2) Open the 2 edge saddles [1] of the lower arm [2], and thread the control panel harness [3] through the lower arm.
Page 136 Chapter 2 screw that was temporarily tightened. Lead the control panel harness [3] through the 2 wire saddles [4]. At this time, check to make sure that the wire saddle [5] at the rear matches the marking [6] on the control panel harness. F-2-136 Close the toner cartridge cover [4].
Page 137: Mounting The Pickup Assembly
Chapter 2 F-2-141 F-2-144 10) Put the control panel unit [1] on the upper arm, and secure it in place 2.2.20 Mounting the Pickup Assembly with a flat-head screw [2] (M4x10) and a W sems screw [3] (M4x12). Mount the rear support cover [4] with a binding screw [5]. 0007-3393 / iR85+ 1) Shift the lever [1] in the direction of the arrow, and remove the pickup...
Page 138: Mounting The Pickup Assembly
Chapter 2 F-2-146 4) Press the releasing button of the front deck (left), and slide it out to the front. Secure the deck locking plate [1] that comes with the machine to the front deck (left) using an RS tightening screw [2] (M4x10; white). Close the front deck (left).
Page 139: Supplying The Toner
Chapter 2 F-2-153 F-2-150 2.2.22 Supplying the Toner 0007-6682 Be sure to insert the toner cartridge so that the marking [3] on it iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 matches the marking [4] on the copier. 1) Take out the toner cartridge [1] for the packaging box. F-2-154 F-2-151 4) Close the hoper cover.
Page 140: Supplying The Toner
Chapter 2 F-2-156 F-2-159 3) Open the hopper cover [1], and insert the toner cartridge [2] from the 2) Remove the fixing tape [1]. front of the machine. F-2-157 F-2-160 3) Open the hopper cover [1], and insert the toner cartridge [2] from the front of the copier.
Page 141: Supplying The Toner
Chapter 2 F-2-162 F-2-165 4) Close the hopper cover. 2.2.25 Supplying the Toner 0007-3398 Be sure to insert the toner carridge so that its marking and the copier's marking match [3]. 1) Take out the toner cartridge [1] from the package. F-2-163 F-2-166 2) Remove the fixing tape [1].
Page 142: Installing The Adf
Chapter 2 F-2-168 2) As needed, connect the reader unit anticondensation heater cable [1]. F-2-171 When mounting, fit the hook [3] of the ADF tray into the notch in the copier; then, slide it to the left, and secure it with screws. 2.2.29 Cassette 0007-6693 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070...
Page 143: Cassette
Chapter 2 2.2.32 Index Paper Attachment Go through the following steps only if Inch-configured paper is not 0007-6700 going to be used. iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Decide on either cassette 3 or 4 for use for index paper. 1) Press the releasing buttons of cassettes 3 and 4, and slide out the Press the releasing button for the cassette, and slide it out to the front.
Page 144: Other Attachment
Chapter 2 Slid out the cassette. F-2-177 2.2.35 Other attachment 0008-3481 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 - Shut-Down Warning Label 1)Select the Shut-Down Warning label [1] of the appropriate language; then, attach it to the left of the main power switch of the machine's right cover (rear).
Page 145: Attaching The Labels, Setting Paper, Checking Images/Operations, And User Mode
Chapter 2 - Shut-Down Warning Label 1)Select the Shut-Down Warning label [1] of the appropriate language; then, attach it to the left of the main power switch of the machine's right cover (rear). F-2-183 8) Press the release button, and slide out the cassette 3/4. 9) Attach the 3-Hole Paper Set labels [1].
Page 146: Attaching The Labels, Setting Paper, Checking Images/Operations, And User Mode
Chapter 2 black copies to ensure stable images: 7) Press the release button, and slide out the cassette 3/4. 18) COPIER>TEST>PG>PG_PICK. 8) Peel off the appropriate cassette size label [1] from the liner of the size 19) Enter the number of the source of paper containing A3 paper, and label (cassette/deck), and attach it on the paper size plate [2] of the press the OK key.
Page 147: Attaching The Labels, Setting Paper, Checking Images/Operations, And User Mode
Chapter 2 Starting Service Mode (Level 2) -Press the Additional Function key. -Press the 2 and 8 keys on the keypad at the same time. -Press the Additional Function key. Press the Additional Function key and the 2 key in succession. 26) Clean up the area around the machine.
Page 148: Attaching The Labels, Setting Paper, Checking Images/Operations, And User Mode
Chapter 2 9) Press the release button, and slide out the cassette 3/4. interleaf mode or otherwise is a high copy volume user, change the 10) Peel off the appropriate cassette size label [1] from the liner of the following service mode settings: size label (cassette/deck), and attach it on the paper size plate [2] of COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TEMP-TBL (Level 2)"5"(Default)->"0"...
Page 149 Chapter 2 9) Press the release button, and slide out the cassette 3/4. 10) Peel off the appropriate cassette size label [1] from the liner of the size label (cassette/deck), and attach it on the paper size plate [2] of the cassette.
Page 150: Changing The Paper Size For The Front Deck (Right, Left)
Chapter 2 interleaf mode or otherwise is a high copy volume user, change the following service mode settings: COPIER>OPTION>BODY>TEMP-TBL (Level 2)"5"(Default)->"0" MEMO: Starting Service Mode (Level 2) -Press the Additional Function key. -Press the 2 and 8 keys on the keypad at the same time. -Press the Additional Function key.
Page 151: If Not Connected To A Network
Chapter 2 4) Put paper in the deck. 5) Slide the deck inside the machine. 6) Peel off the appropriate deck size label [1] from the size label liner (cassette/deck), and attach it on the paper size plate of the deck. F-2-201 F-2-203 7) Start service mode, and register the paper size of the front deck.
Page 152: If Not Connected To A Network
Chapter 2 2.2.48 If Not Connected to a Network 0008-3841 / iR8070 Reference If the machine is not connected to a network, its control panel will indicate the message "Check the Connection to the Network." To disable the message, turn off the following user mode item: system setup>network>Ethernet driver setup>auto detect 2-50...
Page 153: Checking The Connection To The Network
Chapter 2 2.3 Checking the Connection to the Network 2.3.1 Overview 0008-3485 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 The instructions that follow apply only when the machine is connected to a network. If the user's network environment is based on TCP/IP, use the PING function to make sure that the network settings are correct. If the user's network environment is based on IPX/SPX or AppleTalk, on the other hand, such a check need not be made.
Page 154 Chapter 2 <NETWORK> < 1/1 > <READY > PING 0. 0. 0. 0 F-2-206 [1] Result (OK/NG) [2] IP address input 2.3.6 Using the PING Function 0008-3843 / iR8070 1) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>TEST>NETWORK>PING. 2) Enter the correct IP address using the control panel keypad, and press the OK key. 3) Press the Start key.
Page 155: Making A Check Using A Remote Host Address
Chapter 2 2.3.8 Making a Check Using a Remote Host Address 0008-3487 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 You can use a remote host address in combination with the PING function to check the connection to the network. The term "remote host address" refers to the IP address of a PC that is connected to the TCP/IP network to which the machine is connected. 1) Inform the system administrator that you will be checking the network connection using the PING function.
Page 156: Troubleshooting The Network
Chapter 2 2.4 Troubleshooting the Network 2.4.1 Overview 0008-3488 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 The instructions that follow apply only when the machine is connected to a network. If an attempt to connect to the network fails, the following may be suspected: a.the connection between the machine and the network is faulty.
Page 157: Making A Check Using A Local Host Address
Chapter 2 if the IP address is valid. - if the main controller PCB is faulty, replace the PCB. If 'OK' is indicated, suspect a fault in the user's network environment. Report to the system administrator for appropriate remedial action. 2.4.8 Making a Check Using a Local Host Address 0008-3813 / iR85+...
Page 158: Installing The Card Reader
Chapter 2 2.5 Installing the Card Reader 2.5.1 Checking the Contents 0007-2647 / iR8070 T-2-5 Card reader 1 pc. Screw (self-tapping) 4 pc. Screw (M4x6) 1 pc. Relay post header 1 pc. (fitted to card reader cable) Communication mode switching connector 1 pc.
Page 159 Chapter 2 F-2-210 2.5.3 Checking the Contents 0007-6759 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 T-2-7 Card reader 1 pc. Screw (self-tapping) 4 pc. Screw (M4x6) 1 pc. Relay post header 1 pc. (fitted to card reader cable) Communication mode switching connector 1 pc. (keep the connector connected for use) F-2-211 2.5.4 Installing the Card Reader-D1...
Page 160 Chapter 2 As many as 1000 cards starting with the number you entered my be used. 2) Turn off the main power switch. Points to Note When Turning Off the Main Power Switch 1. Hold down the control panel power switch for 3 sec or more. 2.
Page 161 Chapter 2 F-2-215 9) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the inside upper cover [2]. F-2-216 10) Remove the screw [1], and detach the card reader case [2] from the top of the machine. F-2-217 11) Remove the face plate [1]. F-2-218 12) Using 4 self-tapping screws [1], mount the card reader [2] to the card reader case.
Page 162 Chapter 2 F-2-219 13) Using the screw [1], mount the grounding wire [2] to the card reader case plate assembly [3]. Lead the grounding wire [2] through the edge saddle [4]. F-2-220 14) Connect the connector of the card reader to the connector [1] of the machine. F-2-221 15) Using the screw [1] removed in step 10, mount the card reader case to the machine.
Page 163: Installing The Card Reader-D1
Chapter 2 16) Mount the inside upper cover (Use the 5 screws, and connect the 2 connectors that have previously been removed). 17) Mount the process cover unit (4 screws). 18) Attach the primary charging assembly cover (1 screw). 19) Close the toner cartridge cover. 20) Put back the fixing/feeding unit, and set the fixing/feeding assembly lever.
Page 164 Chapter 2 F-2-225 8) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1]. F-2-226 9) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the inside upper cover [2]. F-2-227 10) Remove the screw [1], and detach the card reader case [2] from the top of the machine. F-2-228 11) Remove the face plate [1].
Page 165 Chapter 2 F-2-229 12) Using 4 self-tapping screws [1], mount the card reader [2] to the card reader case. F-2-230 13) Using the screw [1], mount the grounding wire [2] to the card reader case plate assembly [3]. Lead the grounding wire [2] through the edge saddle [4]. F-2-231 14) Connect the connector of the card reader to the connector [1] of the machine.
Page 166: Installing The Card Reader-D1
Chapter 2 15) Using the screw [1] removed in step 10, mount the card reader case to the machine. F-2-233 Take care not to trap the harness indicated with a dashed line. 16) Mount the inside upper cover (Use the 5 screws, and connect the 2 connectors that have previously been removed). 17) Mount the process cover unit (4 screws).
Page 167 Chapter 2 F-2-235 6) Push in the face plate [1] lightly, and take out the card reader base assembly [2] from below. F-2-236 7) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the face plate [2] from the card reader base assembly [3]. (You will use the removed parts later.) F-2-237 8) Remove the 2 screws that remain on the top of the card reader [1].
Page 168 Chapter 2 F-2-238 9) Remove the screw (w/washer) [1] from the rear of the card reader base. Secure the grounding wire [2] with the removed screw (w/ washer) [1]. F-2-239 10) Remove the 2 screws [1] from the front of the card reader base. Secure the face plate [2] removed in step 4 with 2 screws [1] as shown.
Page 169: Installing The Card Reader-D1
Chapter 2 F-2-241 12) While supporting it, mount the card reader assembly [1] with the screw (w/ washer) [2] removed in step 5. F-2-242 13) Mount the primary charging assembly front cover [1] with a screw [2]. F-2-243 14) Close the front cover. 15) Connect the power plug of the copier, and turn on the main power switch.
Page 170 Chapter 2 3) Open the front cover. 4) Remove the screw [1], and detach the primary charging assembly cover [2]. F-2-244 5) Shift down the fixing/feeding assembly lever [1], and slide out the fixing/feeding unit [2]. 6) Open the toner cartridge cover [3]. F-2-245 7) Remove the 4 screws [1], and remove the process unit cover [2].
Page 171 Chapter 2 F-2-247 9) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the inside upper cover [2]. F-2-248 10) Remove the screw [1], and detach the card reader case [2] from the top of the machine. F-2-249 11) Remove the face plate [1]. F-2-250 12) Using 4 self-tapping screws [1], mount the card reader [2] to the card reader case.
Page 172 Chapter 2 F-2-251 13) Using the screw [1], mount the grounding wire [2] to the card reader case plate assembly [3]. Lead the grounding wire [2] through the edge saddle [4]. F-2-252 14) Connect the connector of the card reader to the connector [1] of the machine. F-2-253 15) Using the screw [1] removed in step 10, mount the card reader case to the machine.
Page 173 Chapter 2 16) Mount the inside upper cover (Use the 5 screws, and connect the 2 connectors that have previously been removed). 17) Mount the process cover unit (4 screws). 18) Attach the primary charging assembly cover (1 screw). 19) Close the toner cartridge cover. 20) Put back the fixing/feeding unit, and set the fixing/feeding assembly lever.
Page 174: Installing The Ne Controller
Chapter 2 2.6 Installing the NE Controller 2.6.1 Installing the NE Controller-A1/NE Controller-B1/Copy Data Controller-A1 0007-2650 / iR8070 Here, the instructions are limited to installation to the copier. For how to make various settings, checks to make, and points to note, see the Installation Procedure that comes with a specific controller.
Page 175 Chapter 2 F-2-257 [When Installing a Copy Data Controller-A1 to a 230V Model] 4) Remove the connector fixing screw (bottom) [1]. Bend the terminal of the grounding wire [2] that comes with the machine to the outside, and mount it using a connector fixing screw [1]. F-2-258 5) Connect the connector J525 [1] of the host machine and the cable [3] of the controller.
Page 176: Installing The Ne Controller-A1/Ne Controller-B1/Copy Data Controller-A1
Chapter 2 F-2-260 2.6.2 Installing the NE Controller-A1/NE Controller-B1/Copy Data Controller-A1 0007-3529 / iR85+ Here, the instructions are limited to installation to an machine. For how to make various settings, checks to make, and points to note, see the Installation Procedure that comes with a specific controller.
Page 177 Chapter 2 F-2-263 [When Installing a Copy Data Controller-A1 to a 230V Model] 4) Remove the connector fixing screw (bottom) [1]. Bend the terminal of the grounding wire [2] that comes with the machine to the outside, and mount it using a connector fixing screw [1]. F-2-264 5) Connect the connector J525 [1] of the host machine and the cable [3] of the controller.
Page 178: Installing The Ne Controller-A1/Ne Controller-B1/Copy Data Controller-A1
Chapter 2 F-2-266 2.6.3 Installing the NE Controller-A1/NE Controller-B1/Copy Data Controller-A1 0007-6753 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 Here, the instructions are limited to installation to an Copier. For how to make various settings, checks to make, and points to note, see the Installation Procedure that comes with a specific controller.
Page 179 Chapter 2 F-2-269 [When Installing a Copy Data Controller-A1 to a 230V Model] 4) Remove the connector fixing screw (bottom) [1]. Bend the terminal of the grounding wire [2] that comes with the machine to the outside, and mount it using a connector fixing screw [1]. F-2-270 5) Connect the connector J525 [1] of the host machine and the cable [3] of the controller.
Page 180 Chapter 2 F-2-272 2-78...
Page 181: Chapter 3 Basic Operation
Chapter 3 Basic Operation...
Page 183 Contents Contents 3.1 Construction ...................................3-1 3.1.1 Functional Construction................................3-1 3.1.2 Connection Diagram of the Major PCBs(iR105)......................... 3-1 3.1.3 Functional Construction................................3-2 3.1.4 Wiring Diagram of the Major PCBs ............................3-3 3.1.5 Wiring Diagram of the Major PCBs ............................3-4 3.1.6 Wiring Diagram of the Major PCBs ............................3-5 3.1.7 Inputs to the DC Controller PCB (1/6) ............................
Page 185: Construction
Chapter 3 3.1 Construction 3.1.1 Functional Construction 0006-9138 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 The copier is divided into the following six functional blocks - Original exposure system - Image processing system - Laser exposure system - Image formation system - Pickup/feeding system - Control system Original Original...
Page 186: Functional Construction
Chapter 3 J6807 Key PCB A J6605 J6802 LCD panel J6808 (LCD) Key PCB B J6901 J6803 Control panel Inverter J6601 J6806 J6804 Key PCB C J6805 J6602 J6801 J1018 J1017 J1551 Card Reader unit J1024 Reader-D1 (option) Printer unit Controller block J1532 Copy Data...
Page 187: Wiring Diagram Of The Major Pcbs
Chapter 3 DC controller Control panel Main controller PCB SDRAM Relay PCB Laser driver PCB DC power supply Laser scanner Control System Laser Exposure System Charging Photo- sensitive Cleaning Development drum Image Fomation System Feeding Pickup Derivery Manual control tray feedtray Lower feeding assembry Deck left...
Page 188: Wiring Diagram Of The Major Pcbs
Chapter 3 J6807 J502 Key A Potential J6802 Control panel control PCB J6605 panel J6806 J6803 J519 Stackless feed J6601 Key C driver PCB J6805 Inverter J3602 J6804 Laser scanner J6602 J503 J6808 Key B motor J6801 J6901 J762 J1018 J507 J1104 J526...
Page 189: Wiring Diagram Of The Major Pcbs
Chapter 3 J6807 J502 Key A Potential J6802 Control panel control PCB J6605 panel J6806 J6803 J519 Stackless feed J6601 Key C driver PCB J6805 Inverter J3602 J6804 Laser scanner J6602 J503 J6808 Key B motor J6801 J6901 J762 J1018 J507 J526 J1022...
Page 190: Inputs To The Dc Controller Pcb (1/6)
Chapter 3 J6807 J502 Key A Potential J6802 Control Reader panel J1104 control PCB J6605 panel dif- J6806 ferential J6803 J519 Stackless feed J6601 Key C driver PCB J6805 Inverter J3602 J6804 J5503 J5501 Laser scanner J503 J6602 J6808 motor Key B J6801 J5008...
Page 191: Inputs To The Dc Controller Pcb (2/6)
Chapter 3 DC controller PCB J507 When the scanner is at its Scanner home home position, '1'. (The light PS1S position blocking plate is at PS1.) sensor J507 When the scanner is at the Image image leading edge position, leading edge PS3S '1'.
Page 192: Inputs To The Dc Controller Pcb (3/6)
Chapter 3 DC controller PCB J508 PS16 Reversal When paper is detected, '1'. PS16S sensor J510 PS17 Manual feed When paper is detected, '1'. PS17S tray paper sensor relay J36036 PS18 J3601-1 -B15 J519 Horizontal -B14 J3602-B2 -B11 When paper is detected, '1'. PS18S registration -B13...
Page 193: Inputs To The Dc Controller Pcb (4/6)
Chapter 3 DC controller PCB J518 PS34 Deck (left) PS34S When the lifter is at the upper limit sensor limit, '1'. J510 PS35 Manual feed When paper is detected, '1'. PS35S sensor J515 PS37 Cassette 3 PS37S pickup When paper is detected, '1'. sensor J515 PS38...
Page 194: Inputs To The Dc Controller Pcb (5/6)
Chapter 3 DC controller PCB J513 PS51 Deck (right ) -B10 Approx. level paper level (sheets) PS51S middle sensor 1~375 J513 PS52 -B13 376~750 Deck (right) -B12 paper level PS52S 751~1500 -B11 high sensor J514 PS54 Deck (left) -B10 Approx. level paper level PS54S middle...
Page 195: Inputs To The Dc Controller Pcb (6/6)
Chapter 3 DC controller PCB J503 Original size SIZE1 When an original is detected, '0'. SIZE1 sensor 1 J503 Original size When an original is detected, '0'. SIZE2 SIZE2 sensor 2 J504 Original size SIZE3 When an original is detected, '0'. SIZE3 sensor 3 J504...
Page 196: Outputs From The Dc Controller Pcb (1/7)
Chapter 3 DC controller PCB J513 SVR2 Cassette 3 paper width detecting See D. "Detecting the Cassette SVR2 volume Paper Size" in Chapter 7. J514 SVR3 -A10 Cassette 4 paper See D. "Detecting the Cassette SVR3 width detecting volume Paper Size" in Chapter 7. J504 (hopper internal When toner is absent, '0'.
Page 197: Outputs From The Dc Controller Pcb (2/7)
Chapter 3 DC controller PCB J504 Hopper internal -B13 magnet roller +24V drive clutch -B14 When '0', CL1 turns on. CL1-ON J509 +24V Registration clutch When '0', CL2 turns on. CL2-ON J509 Registration +24V brake clutch When '0', CL3 turns on. CL3-ON J512 -A11...
Page 198: Outputs From The Dc Controller Pcb (3/7)
Chapter 3 DC controller PCB No-stacking feeding driver PCB J3603 J322 Lower feeding J519 CL16 middle clutch -B10 J3602-B9 CL16-ON When '1', CL16 turns on. J3603 Lower feeding J519 CL17 right clutch J3602-B10 CL17-ON When '1', CL17 turns on. +24V J3603 J3601-3 -B11...
Page 199: Outputs From The Dc Controller Pcb (4/7)
Chapter 3 DC controller PCB J512 M0LCK While rotating at constant speed, '0'. -B10 M0-ON -B11 While M0 is rotating, '1'. Drum motor -B12 J514 M1-FG While rotating, '1' M1-ON While M1 is rotating, '1'. Main motor J513 M2-FG While rotating, '1'. M2-ON While M2 is rotating, '1'.
Page 200: Outputs From The Dc Controller Pcb (5/7)
Chapter 3 DC controller PCB J509 M9FW M9RV Transfer/ CCW(rear front) separation M9RV charging wire CW(front rear) M9FW cleaning motor No-stacking feeding J519 J3603 driver PCB J36022 See IV.C. "Controlling the DUPI-OFF Motor DUPI-B Reversal Motor (M11)" in Duplexing DUPI-A driver reversal Chapter 7.
Page 201: Outputs From The Dc Controller Pcb (6/7)
Chapter 3 DC controller PCB J503 While rotating at constant speed, '0' FM5LCK Laser driver FM5-ON While the fan is rotating, 1'. cooling fan J509 -B11 FM6LCK While rotating at constant speed, '0'. -B13 De-curling FM6-ON While the fan is rotating, '1'. -B12 J509 While rotating at constant speed, '0'.
Page 202: Outputs From The Dc Controller Pcb (7/7)
Chapter 3 DC controller PCB J504 LED1 PEXP When '1', turns on. Pre-exposure lamp J504 LED2 PEXP When '1', turns on. Pre-transfer exposure lamp J1002 J506 J1003 FL-CLK FL-ERR PRH-ON Scanning lamp Inverter PCB -B10 PRH-PWM -B11 FL-ON -B12 -B13 FL-PWM J273 J510...
Page 203: Controlling The Main Motor (M1)
Chapter 3 DC controller PC J507 J172-7 J172-6 J172-5 J172-4 J172-3 To ADF J172-2 J172-1 J23-1 +24V J172-1 J23-2 ADF connector of the copier's back Relay PCB J505 J151-5 J151-4 J151-3 J151-2 J151-1 To finisher J48-2 (accessory) +24V J1723-8 J48-1 Finisher connector of the copier's back Relay PCB...
Page 204 Chapter 3 J1720 J611 Relay PCB Drive circuit Main motor (M1) J514 J612 Clock pulse generation circuit MAIN_MOTOR_ON Control DC controller Reference MAIN_MOTOR_FG panel signal generation circuit When the main motor drive signal goes '1', the main motor starts to rotate. When the main motor starts to rotate, the pulse signal goes '1'.
Page 205: Basic Sequence
Chapter 3 3.2 Basic Sequence 3.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations (power-on) 0006-9349 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON 195 degrees 200 degrees WMUP WMUPR STBY Scanner home position sensor (PS1) Initial activation Scanning lamp (FL1) Scanner motor (M4) Fixing main heater (H1)
Page 206 Chapter 3 Main power switch ON Control panel power switch ON 195 degrees 200 degrees WMUP WMUPR STBY Fixing main heater (H1) Controlled to 200 degrees Fixing sub heater (H2) Fixing drive motor (M3) Main motor (M1) Drum motor (MO) Pre-exposure LED assembly Primary charging Grid bias...
Page 207: Chapter 4 Main Controller
Chapter 4 Main Controller...
Page 209 Contents Contents 4.1 Construction ...................................4-1 4.1.1 Functional Construction(iR105) ..............................4-1 4.1.2 Construction/Function.................................. 4-1 4.1.3 Construction/Function.................................. 4-2 4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry .........................4-4 4.2.1 Outline(iR105) ..................................... 4-4 4.2.2 Main Controller PCB ................................... 4-4 4.2.3 Main Controller PCB(iR105)............................... 4-5 4.2.4 Hard Disk Drive(iR105) ................................4-5 4.3 Start-Up Sequence................................4-6 4.3.1 Outline(iR105) .....................................
Page 210 Contents 4.7.2.7 Removing the Main Controller PCB ................................4-28 4.7.2.8 When Replacing the Main Controller PCB ..............................4-29 4.7.3 Boot ROM....................................4-29 4.7.3.1 Removing the Rear Cover..................................... 4-29 4.7.3.2 Removing the Rear Cover..................................... 4-29 4.7.3.3 Removing the Rear Cover..................................... 4-30 4.7.3.4 Removing the Main Controller Box Cover..............................
Page 211: Construction
Chapter 4 4.1 Construction 4.1.1 Functional Construction(iR105) 0006-9729 iR105 The machine may be broadly divided into the following functional blocks (controller area in the shaded block): Reader unit Control panel Controller block Options boards Main controller PCB Printer unit F-4-1 4.1.2 Construction/Function 0008-2233 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070...
Page 212 Chapter 4 Reader unit Main controller PCB Image memory (SDRAM) Boot ROM SRAM USB port RISER board Ethernet 10/100BASE-T Hard disk drive DC controller PCB F-4-2 4.1.3 Construction/Function 0008-8665 iR85+ The machine's main controller block consists of the following and has the following functions: T-4-2 Item Description...
Page 213 Chapter 4 Main controller PCB Image memory (SDRAM) Boot ROM SRAM USB port RISER board Ethernet 10/100BASE-T Hard disk drive DC controller PCB F-4-3...
Page 214: Construction Of The Electrical Circuitry
Chapter 4 4.2 Construction of the Electrical Circuitry 4.2.1 Outline(iR105) 0006-9741 iR105 The major electrical mechanisms of the controller block are controlled by the CPU on the main controller PCB; the following table shows the functions of the IC and hard disk located around the CPU (e.g., RAM, DIMM) and of the CPU itself: 4.2.2 Main Controller PCB 0008-2235 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070...
Page 215: Main Controller Pcb(Ir105)
Chapter 4 4.2.3 Main Controller PCB(iR105) 0006-9744 iR105 T-4-4 Name Description - Controlling image processing of input image data from the reader unit - Controlling image processing of output image data to the printer unit - Controlling the hard disk drive - Controlling the following: network interface, DMA controller, PCI interface, ROM/RAM interface - Storing temporarily program data and image data...
Page 216: Outline(Ir105)
Chapter 4 4.3 Start-Up Sequence 4.3.1 Outline(iR105) 0006-9769 iR105 The system software used to control the machine is stored on the HDD. The CPU on the main controller PCB reads the system software from the HDD to write to the SDRAM mounted on the DIMM socket of the main controller PCB, requiring time before the control panel becomes ready for operation after the main power switch is turned on.
Page 217: Start-Up Sequence
Chapter 4 4.3.3 Start-Up Sequence(iR105) 0006-9777 iR105 When the main power switch is turned on, the CPU on the main controller PCB first executes the self-diagnosis program stored in the boot ROM. The self-diagnosis program checks the condition of the SDRAM and the HDD; if a fault is found, it will indicate an error code in the control panel. SD RAM System Image data...
Page 218: Start-Up Sequence
Chapter 4 SD RAM System Image data area area Self- Boot diagnosis program program Boot ROM Main controller PCB : Access to the program during execution : Flow of the system program F-4-9 4.3.4 Start-Up Sequence 0008-2238 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 <Boot ROM Area>...
Page 219: Start-Up Sequence
Chapter 4 - While the Self-Diagnosis Program Is Being Executed Image memory (SDRAM) System Image data area area Boot Self diagnosis program program BootROM Main controller PCB : access to the program during execution : access for checking F-4-11 - While the Boot Program Is Being Run Image memory (SDRAM) System area Image data...
Page 220 Chapter 4 The program is used to check the condition of the image memory (SDRAM) and the HDD. The machine will indicate an error code if it finds a fault while running the program. - Boot Program (interval 2) When the self-diagnosis program ends normally, the CPU on the main controller PCB executes the boot program. The program is used to read the system software from the HDD to write it into the image memory (SDRAM).
Page 221: Construction Of The System Software(Ir105)
Chapter 4 - While the Boot Program Is Being Run Image memory (SDRAM) System area Image data area System software Boot Self-diagnosis program program BootROM Main controller PCB : access to the program during execution. : flow of the system program. F-4-15 4.3.6 Construction of the System Software(iR105) 0006-9794...
Page 222 Chapter 4 Description Remedy Suspension of a write operation to the boot 1. Find the sector for which the write operation has been device has been detected. suspended; then, execute recovery operation. <in the case of black-and-white E code> 1-1 The machine will not permit the use of service mode; go through the following: 1-2 Turn off the power.
Page 223 Chapter 4 CHK- Partition in Description 11, 21 13, 25 10, 12, TYPE question 14, 22, 23, 24 At startup During routine operation Reme-dy Reme- Reme- Reme-dy Reme-dy Reme- PDLDEV PDL-related file storage area (font, registered form, ICC profile, color correction info file for PDL function)
Page 224 Chapter 4 CHK- Partition in Description Typical item Normal mode Safe mode + TYPE question deleted formatting by + HDD HD-CLEAR formatting formatting with with SST FSTPDEV Image data Entire Possible (4 FSTDEV Possible; storage area collection of partitions, specified (4 however, (e.g., Box) image data...
Page 225 Chapter 4 * When the machine starts up for the first time after its HDD has been formatted, it may take longer than usual to complete the startup session. [Remedy] T-4-9 Description Remedy The ongoing write operation has been 1. Set '0' to TYPE-TYPE, and execute HDD- suspended (at startup).
Page 226 Chapter 4 Description Remedy There is poor contact of the HDD, or 1. Check the cable and power supply connectors. a v.x Works system error has 2. If the symptom still exits after the foregoing, occurred. start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using the SST and re-install the system software (System, Language, RUI).
Page 227: Shut-Down Sequence
Chapter 4 4.4 Shut-Down Sequence 4.4.1 Overview 0008-2263 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 If the main power switch is turned off while the machine is accessing its HDD, damage can well occur on the HDD. To avoid such damage, the machine is provided with a shut-down sequence.
Page 228: Image Processing
Chapter 4 4.5 Image Processing 4.5.1 Outline(iR105) 0006-9796 iR105 The digital processing and controlling of image memory of the machine are performed by the main controller PCB. The following is a block diagram showing its digital image processing: Reader unit Image data Reader PG after shading...
Page 229: Input Image Processing(Ir105)
Chapter 4 Other iR machine Original Copy Scan SEND PullScan E-Mail PDL Print Image data Print output F-4-18 4.5.3 Input Image Processing(iR105) 0006-9799 iR105 Input image data from the reader unit is processed as follows: Image Data from the Reader Unit The image signals from the reader unit is subjected to shading correction and turned into 8-bit, 256-gradation intensity signals.
Page 230: Construction Of The Image Processing Module
Chapter 4 Reader unit Reader controller PCB - image memory - program (temporary storage) Reader unit input processing block Processes the image data read by the reader unit. SDRAM Printer unit output image processing block Processes image data for Main controller PCB output to the printer unit.
Page 231: Controlling The Image Memory(Ir105)
Chapter 4 4.5.6 Controlling the Image Memory(iR105) 0006-9800 iR105 The binary image data is controlled in image memory as follows: Compression/Expansion, Rotation, and Enlargement/Reduction Binary images are processed for compression/expansion (for electronic sorting), rotation, or resolution conversion. SDRAM The image data is temporarily stored as part of image memory control. 4.5.7 Reader Unit Input Image Processing 0008-2267 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070...
Page 232: Compression/Extension/Editing Block
Chapter 4 4.5.9 Compression/Extension/Editing Block 0008-2268 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 Here, image data is processed for compression, extension, and editing. Main controller PCB Reader unit image PDL image processing block processing block SDRAM Enlargement/ Compression reduction Expansion Rotation Integration to printer unit output image processing block F-4-22 4.5.10 Compression/Extension/Editing Block...
Page 233 Chapter 4 Main controller PCB Compression/expansion/editing block Binary density conversion Enlargement/reduction Smoothing For PDL data, Thickening when fine line processing is ON To DC controller PCB F-4-24 4-23...
Page 234: Flow Of Image Data
Chapter 4 4.6 Flow of Image Data 4.6.1 Flow of Image Data for the Copy Function 0008-2273 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 The following is the flow of image data when the Copy Function is in use: Reader unit Main control PCB Image processing block for reader unit SDRAM Data rotation...
Page 235: Flow Of Image Data For The Send Function
Chapter 4 4.6.3 Flow of Image Data for the SEND Function 0008-2275 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 The following is the flow of image data when the SEND function is in use. Reader unit Main controller PCB Image processing block for reader unit SDRAM Data expansion Data rotation...
Page 236: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 4 4.7 Parts Replacement Procedure 4.7.1 Main Controller Box 4.7.1.1 Removing the Rear Cover 0008-2726 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Remove the 11 mounting screws [1], and detach the rear cover [2]. F-4-31 4.7.1.4 Removing the System Connector Cover 0008-2728 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the system connector cover [2].
Page 237: Main Controller Pcb
Chapter 4 F-4-34 2) Open the main controller box [1] in the arrow direction, and disconnect the 2 connectors [2]. F-4-37 4.7.2.2 Removing the Rear Cover 0008-9358 iR85+ 1) Remove the 11 mounting screws [1], and detach the rear cover [2]. F-4-35 3) Detach the hinges [2] [3] to remove the main controller box [1] while lifting the main controller box slightly.
Page 238: Removing The Main Controller Box Cover
Chapter 4 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the differential PCB [2] in the arrow direction. F-4-42 4.7.2.6 Removing the Pixel/Line Conversion PCB F-4-39 0008-2696 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 4.7.2.4 Removing the Main Controller Box Cover 1) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the PCB mount [2].
Page 239: When Replacing The Main Controller Pcb
Chapter 4 Enter the first of the numbers that will be used for group control, and press the OK key (e.g., if you are planning to use cards from No. 1 thorough No. 100, enter '1'). 5) turn off and then on the main power. 6) Check the count control mechanism in user mode.
Page 240: Removing The Main Controller Box Cover
Chapter 4 F-4-50 F-4-48 4.7.3.5 Removing the Boot ROM 4.7.3.3 Removing the Rear Cover 0008-2607 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 0008-9688 / iR8070 1) Push the release lever [1] in the arrow direction to release the Boot ROM [2], and remove the Boot ROM. 1) Remove the rear upper cover (4 screws).
Page 241: Removing The Main Controller Box Cover
Chapter 4 F-4-54 F-4-52 4.7.4.4 Removing the Differential PCB/Differential PCB Relay Board 4.7.4.2 Removing the Rear Cover 0008-2609 0008-9689 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 / iR8070 1) Loosen the 2 screws [1], and remove the reader controller 1) Remove the rear upper cover (4 screws). communication cable [2].
Page 242: Removing The Rear Cover
Chapter 4 Keep the following in mind when attaching/removing the hard disk. 1. Take countermeasures against electrostatic before work to prevent the hard disk from being damaged by electrostatic discharge. 2. Do not give a shock to the hard disk. 4.7.5.2 Removing the Rear Cover 0008-2680 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070...
Page 243: Points To Note On Attaching The Hard Disk
Chapter 4 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the differential PCB [2] in the arrow direction. F-4-62 4.7.5.7 Removing the Hard Disk F-4-65 0008-2611 4.7.5.8 Points to Note on Attaching the Hard Disk iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 0008-2612 1) Remove the screw [1], and detach the counter memory PCB [2].
Page 244: Removing The Rear Cover
Chapter 4 4.7.6.2 Removing the Rear Cover 0008-9370 iR85+ 1) Remove the 11 mounting screws [1], and detach the rear cover [2]. F-4-69 4.7.6.5 Removing the Main Controller Box Cover 0008-4388 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the main controller box cover [2].
Page 245 Chapter 4 F-4-72 4-35...
Page 247: Chapter 5 Original Exposure System
Chapter 5 Original Exposure System...
Page 249 Contents Contents 5.1 Construction ...................................5-1 5.1.1 Outline of the Original Exposure System(iR105)........................5-1 5.1.2 Outline......................................5-1 5.1.3 Major Components..................................5-2 5.1.4 Arrangement of PCBs .................................. 5-3 5.1.5 Outline......................................5-3 5.1.6 Major Components..................................5-4 5.1.7 Arrangement of PCBs .................................. 5-5 5.2 Basic Sequence ................................5-7 5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations ..............................
Page 250 Contents 5.4.2.3 Removing the CCD Unit....................................5-28 5.4.2.4 When Replacing the CCD Unit ..................................5-29 5.4.2.5 When Replacing the CCD Unit ..................................5-29 5.4.2.6 When Replacing the CCD/AP Unit ................................5-29 5.4.2.7 Points to Note when Replacing the CCD Unit ............................. 5-30 5.4.3 Standard White Plate..................................
Page 251 Contents 5.4.14.1 Removing the HP Sensor ....................................5-45 5.4.14.2 Removing the Scanner Home Position Sensor............................5-45 5.4.14.3 Removing the Scanner Home Position Sensor............................5-46 5.4.15 Copyboard Glass Sensor ................................5-46 5.4.15.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass Sensor..............................5-46 5.4.15.2 Removing the Copyboard Glass Sensor..............................5-46 5.4.16 Image Leading Edge Sensor ..............................5-47 5.4.16.1 Removing the Image Leading Edge Sensor ..............................5-47 5.4.16.2 Removing the Image Leading Edge Sensor ..............................5-47 5.4.17 Scanner Drive Cable ................................
Page 253: Construction
Chapter 5 5.1 Construction 5.1.1 Outline of the Original Exposure System(iR105) 0006-9374 iR105 The major changes made to the original exposure system are as follows: - Enlargement/Reproduction - 4-channel high-speed reading CCD (see discussions of image processing system) - CCD adjustment (see discussions of image processing system) - PCB arrangement - ADF mechanism (new) For others, see T02-202-01 for a table of differences.
Page 254: Major Components
Chapter 5 Scanning lamp control [1] Pre-heat control by a fluorescent lamp heater [2] Pre-heat voltage control [3] Initial activation control [4] Intensity control by an intensity sensor [5] Fluorescent lamp life detection Original size detection [1] By an original size sensor [2] By the ADF Others Copyboard glass sensor (PS57)
Page 255: Arrangement Of Pcbs
Chapter 5 Component Notation Description Scanning lamp Fluorescent amp (rated at 43 W) Scanner motor 5-phase stepping motor Scanner home position Photointerrupter (detects the scanner home Image leading edge Photointerrupter (detects the image leading edge) Copyboard glass sensor PS57 Photointerrupter (detects the presence/absence of the copyboard glass) Fluorescent lamp Thermistor (detects the fluorescent lamp heater...
Page 256: Major Components
Chapter 5 The major functions of the original exposure system are as follows: T-5-4 Item Description Scanning lamp Xenon lamp Original Scanning In book mode: by moving the scanner. With ADF in use: by stream reading while holding the No. 1 mirror base fixed in position.
Page 257: Arrangement Of Pcbs
Chapter 5 Scanner motor (M101) Scanning Scanner HP lamp (LA101) sensor (PS102) Light-blocking Copyboard cover plate sensor (PS103) (forward) No. 1 mirror base (reverse) No. 2 mirror base F-5-6 T-5-5 Component Notation Description Scanning lamp LA101 Xenon lamp (intensity of 70,000 lx) Scanner motor M101 2-phase stepping motor (under pulse control)
Page 258 Chapter 5 T-5-6 Fuse PCB Inverter PCB Reader controller PCB CCD/AP PCB Differential PCB...
Page 259: Basic Sequence
Chapter 5 5.2 Basic Sequence 5.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations 0006-9414 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 · Lamp performance measurement [1] In book mode, turns on as soon as the original size is found. · Heating [2] In ADF mode, turns on as soon as an original is placed in the ADF. Control Copy Start Main power...
Page 260: Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Cover Open
Chapter 5 Copyboard cover opens Copyboard cover closes Start key ON SREADY SCFW STBY SCRV STBY Copyboard cover sensor (PS103) Scanner HP sensor (PS102) Scanning lamp (LA101) Scanner motor Forward Reverse (M101) Start position Start position Point of original size detection F-5-10 *1: original size detection.
Page 261 Chapter 5 Image Stream reading leading position Point of original Image Stop edge (start position) size detection position 1. The copyboard cover is opened. The scanner moves to the point of original detection. 2. The Start key is pressed. After the original size has been detected, the scanner moves to home position.
Page 262: Various Control
Chapter 5 5.3 Various Control 5.3.1 Controlling the Scanner Drive System 5.3.1.1 Outline 0006-9418 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 Figure shows the components of the scanner drive system. [1] Direction of motor rotation [2] Speed of motor rotation Copyboard glass sensor (PS57) Used to detect the presence/absent of the copyboard glass.
Page 263 Chapter 5 The number of steps (clock signals) is determined based on Relay PCB combinations of D0 through D3. For motor drive J801 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 J506A J802 Not used J803 OPT-D0 Scanner motor OPT-D1 OPT-D2 OPT-D3 OPT-CLK Excitation...
Page 264: Preventing Overheating Of The Scanner Motor
Chapter 5 Related Service Mode COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-S Use it to adjust the home position (standard (scanner home position adjustment) white plate read position) by entering a setting. If the standard white plate is soiled, use this mode to avoid reading the soiled area. Vertical HP sensor size plate...
Page 265: Outline
Chapter 5 5.3.1.4 Outline 0008-7401 / iR8070 The following parts are associated with the scanner drive system. Scanner motor (M101) Drive signal Reader Light-blocking Scanner HP controller plate sensor (PS102) (forward) No. 1 mirror base (reverse) Copyboard cover sensor (PS103) No.
Page 266: Enlargement/Reduction
Chapter 5 [2] Approach run. Used to ensure that speed stabilizes. [3] Image read. Used to read the image at a specific speed suited to the read ratio. [4] Deceleration. Used to enable the scanner to speed down and stop promptly, starting at the end of the image. Reversing the Scanner After Scanning in Main Reading Direction When the image has been scanned, the No.
Page 267: Changing The Reproduction Ratio In Sub Scanning Direction
Chapter 5 The machine scans originals faster to support its higher speed of printing. Under specific conditions, it uses a digital method for enlargement/reduction in combination to enable a higher scanning speed, while keeping the speed of the scanner motor to more or less the same as that of the GP605 (iR600). Normally, copying with the ADF in use is in stream reading;...
Page 268: Stabilizing The Scanning Lamp(Ir105)
Chapter 5 Reference intensity level for comparison against FL-DTCT. When '0' ,the scanner heater turns on. Difference between FL-REF and FL-DTCT. FL-PWM is corrected based on this data. J852 Voltage to suit the light intensity. 24 V FL-DTCT To light intensity sensor Light intensity control PCB 38 V To temperature sensor/scanner...
Page 269: Controlling Pre-Heat Voltage
Chapter 5 Main power Control panel Copy Start switch ON switch ON key ON SLEEP WMUPR STBY SCFW SCRV LSTR STBY WMUP INTR Controlled Fluorescent heater 70˚C Controlled to 70˚C to 70˚C (H5) Initial Scanning lamp activation (FL1) F-5-24 5.3.3.4 Controlling Pre-Heat Voltage 0006-9430 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 A pre-heat voltage is applied to the fluorescnet lamp even when the lamp remains off so as to ensure an optimum intensity in the shortest time possible.
Page 270: Detecting An Error
Chapter 5 The fluorescent lamp is assumed to have reached Purpose of the Intensity Check a level appropriate to activation when the [1] To determine an optimum temperature around it reaches 70˚C, and the pre- level for pre-heat voltage. Control [2] To find out the remaining life Main power panel...
Page 271: Outline
Chapter 5 T-5-14 Related Error Code E220 [1] While in standby, the scanning lamp turns on. (detected in (activation error) reference to the voltage of FL-DTCT) [2] During scanning, the scanning lamp turns off. (detected in reference to the voltage of FL-DTCT) E222 [1] When the main power switch is turned on, the temperature does (fluorescent lamp heater error)
Page 272: Detecting The Size Of Originals
Chapter 5 (e.g., output open, short circuit, leak) in the inverter circuit. A fault in the lamp (low inten-sity, activation failure) will be identified as an activation error caused by lack of intensity during initial activation (e.g., at time of shading correction). ERROR CODE: E220 It is used to indicate a fault in the inverter PCB.
Page 273: Outline
Chapter 5 Machine-side open/closed detection sensor ADF-side open/closed detection sensor F-5-31 - When the ADF Is Opened When the ADF is opened, the ADF-side sensor goes ON as soon as it is opened 5 deg or higher [1], causing the machine to assume that the ADF has been opened and that the original has been removed;...
Page 274: Outline Of Detection
Chapter 5 <AB-Configuration> Original sensor Point of original detection 1 Point of original detection 2 Point of original detection 3 Point of original detection 4 Point of CCD original detection F-5-34 <Inch-Configuration Original sensor Point of original LTRR detection 1 Point of original 279.4×431.8mm detection 2...
Page 275: Book Mode, 1 Original, Copyboard Cover Close
Chapter 5 (external light) F-5-37 [3] An original is placed. The width of the original is identified inrelation to the presence/absence of externallight; here, the absence of an original is identified at points in question, eliminating B5, B4, A4, and A3. Original (A4R) (external light) F-5-38...
Page 276 Chapter 5 Xenon lamp Original sensor Point of original detection 1 Copyboard cover Point of original detection 2 Point of original detection 3 Point of original detection 4 Reader unit Copyboard glass Point of original detection F-5-40 [2] The copyboard cover is opened. Detection starts of external light in main scanning direction.
Page 277: Dirt Sensor Control
Chapter 5 T-5-16 AB-Configuration Inch-Configuration Point of CCD detection Originals Original Originals Point of CCD Original detection size sensor size sensor 11"x 7" LTRR None yes: Changes no: Does not changes None 5.3.5 Dirt Sensor Control 5.3.5.1 Detecting Dust in Stream Reading 0006-9651 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 In addition to the common points for stream reading, the machine uses an additional 6 points each for small-size and large-size sheets at intervals of 0.5...
Page 278 Chapter 5 Label 185mm 385mm Small-size point of Large-size point of reference for reading reference for reading Points of cleaning F-5-47 For the following, the machine can indicate the cleaning message in the absence of dust on the glass: - The ADF feeding belt is appreciably soiled. - CCD-ADJ/LUT-ADJ is not executed correctly.
Page 279: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 5 5.4 Parts Replacement Procedure 5.4.1 Reader Unit 5.4.1.1 Removing the Reader Unit 0008-8033 / iR8070 1) Remove the ADF. 2) Remove the upper right cover (inside) 3) Remove the rear upper cover (4 screws). 4) Remove the reader rear cover. 5) Remove the screw [1], and detach the reader fixing plate [2] and the washer [3] (1 each).
Page 280: Removing The Ccd Unit
Chapter 5 F-5-54 F-5-52 5.4.2.3 Removing the CCD Unit 5.4.2.2 Removing the CCD Unit 0008-8132 0007-2571 / iR8070 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Remove the upper right cover or slide the reader unit. 1) Remove the reader controller cover. 2) Remove the reader right cover and detach the copyboard glass. 2) Free the front/rear claw [2] of the CCD cover [1], and detach the CCD 3) Move the No.
Page 281: When Replacing The Ccd Unit
Chapter 5 5.4.2.5 When Replacing the CCD Unit 0008-8122 1) Check to make sure that the Execution/Memory lamp in the control panel is OFF, and turn off the main power switch. 2) Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. The machine remains powered as long as the power plug is connected.
Page 282: Points To Note When Replacing The Ccd Unit
Chapter 5 COPIER>ADJUST>CCD 5.4.2.7 Points to Note when Replacing the CCD Unit 0009-0933 / iR8070 1) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory lamp in the control panel is OFF, and turn off the main power switch. 2) Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. F-5-64 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the standard white plate cover [2].
Page 283: When Replacing The Standard White Plate
Chapter 5 4) Assemble the machine, and connect the power plug; then, turn on the main power switch. 5) Execute the following in service mode in sequence: 1. COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ 2. COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ 6) Inplement the service mode described below to the service sheet which is to be kept in the service log book case.
Page 284 Chapter 5 F-5-72 F-5-75 6) Remove the scanning lamp [1] (w/scanning heater) to the front. When mounting the anti-reflection plate, be sure to fit the plate firmly in the cut-in ([2] at front, [3] at rear) of the No. 1 mirror base. Also, be sure that the connector in step 5) is firmly to the anti-reflection plate.
Page 285 Chapter 5 the cut-in ([2] at front, [3] at rear) of the No. 1 mirror base. Also, be sure that the connector in step 5) is firmly to the anti-reflection plate. F-5-78 3) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the original lamp inside cover [2].
Page 286: Removing The Scanning Lamp
Chapter 5 F-5-84 7) Detach the scanning lamp heater [1] from the scanning lamp [2]. F-5-86 7) Remove the four screws [1], and detach the blanking plate [2]. F-5-85 5.4.4.3 Removing the Scanning Lamp 0008-8037 / iR8070 1) Remove the copyboard glass. 2) Remove the right upper cover and the right upper cover base.
Page 287: Points To Note When Replacing The Scanning Lamp
Chapter 5 the light opening [5]. - Be sure to mount the scanning lamp so that the notation/marking is to the upper front of the machine. F-5-89 5.4.4.4 Points to Note When Replacing the Scanning Lamp 0007-1561 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 - Do not work if the surface of the scanning lamp is hot.
Page 288: After Replacing The Scanning Lamp
Chapter 5 5.4.4.8 When Replacing the Scanning Lamp 5.4.5.2 Removing the Reader Controller PCB Unit 0008-8582 0008-8019 1) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory lamp in the control 1) Remove the reader controller cover. panel is OFF, and turn off the main power switch. 2) Disconnect the 8 connectors of the reader controller PCB, DDIS 2) Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.
Page 289: When Replacing The Reader Controller Pcb
Chapter 5 and COPIER> FUNCTION> MISCP> USER-PRT. 2) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory lamp in the control panel is OFF, and turn off the main power switch. 3) Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. The machine remains powered as long as the power plug is connected. Be sure to disconnect the power plug from the wall outlet.
Page 290: Removing The Inverter Pcb
Chapter 5 [2] [1] [2] [1] F-5-97 F-5-100 5) Free the left and right hooks [2] (1 pc. each) on the mounting plate of 5) Free the left and right hooks [2] (1 pc. each) on the mounting plate of the inverter unit [1], and detach them upward.
Page 291: Light Intensity Control Pcb
Chapter 5 F-5-103 3) Disconnect the two connectors[2] from the inverter PCB [1]. F-5-107 5.4.7 Light Intensity Control PCB 5.4.7.1 Removing the Light Adjustment PCB 0007-1760 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Remove the copyboard glass. F-5-104 2) Remove the screw [1] from the No. 1 mirror base assembly; then, while pushing down the claws [2], detach the light adjustment PCB 4) Remove the two screws [1], and pull out the inverter unit [2].
Page 292: Removing The Transformer Unit
Chapter 5 5.4.7.2 Removing the Light Adjustment PCB 0008-8009 1) Remove the copyboard glass. 2) Remove the screw [1] from the No. 1 mirror base assembly; then, while pushing down the claws [2], detach the light adjustment PCB holder. F-5-112 5.4.8.2 Removing the Transformer Unit 0008-8011 1) Remove the rear cover.
Page 293: Removing The Transformer Pcb(Ir105)
Chapter 5 5.4.8.4 Removing the Transformer PCB(iR105) 0007-2508 iR105 1) Remove the rear upper cover. (2 screws) 2) Remove the inverter cooling fan duct. (See 8.4.3.h.) 3) Disconnect the connectors [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the transformer PCB [3]. F-5-117 5.4.10 Fuse PCB 5.4.10.1 Removing the Fuse PCB...
Page 294: Scanner Motor
Chapter 5 5.4.11 Scanner Motor When mounting it, be sure to set the tension to 10 -/+2 N (1 -/+0.2 kgf) using a spring gauge for correct positioning. 5.4.11.1 Removing the Scanner Motor 0007-1753 5.4.11.2 Removing the Scanner Motor iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 0008-8043 1) Remove the ADF.
Page 295: Mounting The Scanner Motor
Chapter 5 to the belt; then, secure it in place with three screws (See 3.9.5 Use the springs and the screws removed in step 5)). F-5-130 5.4.12 Copyboard Cover Open/Close Sensor 5.4.12.1 Removing the Copyboard Cover Sensor F-5-127 0008-8068 / iR8070 5) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the harness from the 2 edge saddles [2].
Page 296: Removing The Original Size Sensor
Chapter 5 F-5-133 4) Disconnect the connector [1] (1 pc. each), and detach the original size F-5-136 1/2 [2]. 5.4.13.3 Removing the Original Size Sensor 0008-8063 / iR8070 1) Remove the copyboard glass. 2) Move the No. 1 mirror base to the left end. 3) Remove the screw [1], and disconnect the connector [2];...
Page 297: Scanner Home Position Sensor
Chapter 5 4) Disconnect the connector [1] (1 pc. each), and detach the original size sensor 3/4 [2]. F-5-138 4) Disconnect the connector [1] (1 pc. each), and detach the original size F-5-141 sensor 3/4 [2]. 5.4.14 Scanner Home Position Sensor 5.4.14.1 Removing the HP Sensor 0008-8611 / iR8070...
Page 298: Copyboard Glass Sensor
Chapter 5 F-5-144 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the scanner home position sensor [3]. F-5-147 5.4.15 Copyboard Glass Sensor 5.4.15.1 Removing the Copyboard Glass Sensor 0007-2552 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Remove the transformer unit. 2) Free the harness from the wire saddle [1], and remove the screw [2];...
Page 299: Image Leading Edge Sensor
Chapter 5 1) Remove the transformer unit. 2) Free the harness from the wire saddle [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the sensor mounting plate [3]. [2] [1] F-5-153 5.4.16.2 Removing the Image Leading Edge Sensor 0008-8025 F-5-150 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the copyboard glass sensor 1) Remove the transformer unit.
Page 300 Chapter 5 4) Remove the inverter unit. 7) Fit the mirror positioning tool [1] between the No. 1 mirror base and 5) Move the No. 1 mirror case where the cable fixing [1] of the base is the No. 2 mirror base; then, fit the pin [2] attached to the mirror visible from the opening in the side plate of the machine.
Page 301 Chapter 5 (rear) Steel ball [4] Wind 7 times. Put the steel ball in the hole of the pulley. Wind the cable so that the gap, if any, is minimum. F-5-162 9) Detach the mirror positioning tool. Tighten temporarily. 10) Reverse steps 1) through 4). 5.4.17.2 Adjusting the Tension of the Scanner Drive Cable 0008-8007...
Page 302: Removing The Scanner System Drive Cable
Chapter 5 9) Secure the cable fixing [1] that was temporarily fixed in place in step 6) by tightening the 2 screws [2] from the opening in the side plate. (front) F-5-171 7) Remove the 15 screws [1], and remove the two screws [2]; then, detach the reader upper frame [3].
Page 303 Chapter 5 (before freeing) F-5-174 When moving the mirror base, be sure not to touch the mirror or the lamp or impose force to avoid dirt or damage. 4) Peel off the Warning label [1] from the flexible cable [2]. (after freeing) F-5-176...
Page 304: Routing The Scanner Drive Cable
Chapter 5 the mirror without detaching the cable). 1) Remove the right glass retainer (2 screws). 2) Remove the copyboard. 3) Move the No. 1 mirror base [1] to the center. (before freeing) F-5-178 (after freeing) When moving the mirror base, be sure not to touch the mirror or the lamp or impose force to avoid dirt or damage.
Page 305: Positioning The No. 1/2 Mirror Base
Chapter 5 cable metal fixing is inside. 3) Hook the cable on each pulley, and temporarily fix one end to the cable fixing plate and the other end to the hook of the reader frame. 4) Temporarily fix the cable metal fixing to the No. 1 mirror base (Do not fully secure it).
Page 307: Chapter 6 Image Processing System
Chapter 6 Image Processing System...
Page 309 Contents Contents 6.1 Outline....................................6-1 6.1.1 Outline of the Image Processing System ............................. 6-1 6.1.2 Outline......................................6-1 6.2 Analog Image Processing...............................6-2 6.2.1 Analog Image Processing ................................6-2 6.2.2 Outline......................................6-2 6.2.3 Driving the CCD ..................................6-3 6.2.4 Gain Correction and Offset Correction of the CCD Output ......................6-3 6.2.5 A/D Conversion of the CCD Output............................
Page 311: Outline
Chapter 6 6.1 Outline 6.1.1 Outline of the Image Processing System 0006-9656 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 The image processing system has the following major functions: - CCD (image sensor) number of lines: 1; number of pixels: 7500; pixel size: 7 x 7 um - Shading Correction shading adjustment: executed in service mode shading correction: executed for each copy...
Page 312: Analog Image Processing
Chapter 6 6.2 Analog Image Processing 6.2.1 Analog Image Processing 0006-9678 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 Analog image processing is performed by the CCD/AP PCB, and it mainly consists of the following: - CCD drive - CCD output gain correction, offset correction - CCD output A/D conversion J1501 J1102...
Page 313: Driving The Ccd
Chapter 6 6.2.3 Driving the CCD 0008-9642 / iR8070 The machine's CCD sensor is a single-line linear image sensor, and is composed of 7450 pixel photo cells. The signals subjected to phtoconversion in the light-receiving segment are sent out in two types of analog signals: even-number (EVEN) pixels and odd- number (ODD) pixels.
Page 314: Ccd Adjustment
Chapter 6 Direction of charge transfer Direction of charge transfer Clock pulse C Clock pulse A Transfer unit C Transfer unit A Output Output unit A unit C Light- shift receiving 7500 7499 7498 7497 3754 3753 3752 3751 3750 3749 3748 3747 pulse unit Output...
Page 315: Digital Image Processing
Chapter 6 6.3 Digital Image Processing 6.3.1 Digital Image Processing 0006-9680 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 Digital image processing is performed by the reader controller PCB, and it mainly consists of the following: - shading correction - auto density correction (AE) - conversion of 4-channel pixel data to 2-channel pixel data Reader controller PCB J1502 J1107...
Page 316: Shading Correction
Chapter 6 As needed, the machine rotates the image, thereby reducing waste of paper. The time it saves from not having to detect the orientation of all originals also helps increase its productivity. 0˚ The result of detection is sent to the reader controller [1] 0˚...
Page 317: Auto Density Adjustment (Ae)
Chapter 6 CCD output Characteristics after correction Characteristics Target value before correction Results of measurement White Original density Standard white plate F-6-11 d. Edge Gain Correction (ADF in use) In stream reading with the ADF in use, the No. 1 mirror base is fixed in position. To check for changes in the intensity of the scanning lamp, the edge gain correction plate (gray;...
Page 318 Chapter 6 - COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> EGGN-ST (Enter an adjustment value for the end gain correction start position) - COPIER> ADJUST> CCD> EGGN-END (Enter an adjustment value for the end gain correction end position) Enter the edge gain correction value on the service label. Service Mode: - COPIER>ADJUST>AE>AE-TBL (text density adjustment for realtime AE mode) Use it to change the parameter for adjustment of the density correction curve (for real-time AE mode;...
Page 319: Chapter 7 Laser Exposure
Chapter 7 Laser Exposure...
Page 321 Contents Contents 7.1 Construction ...................................7-1 7.1.1 Outline of the Laser Exposure System............................7-1 7.1.2 Outline of the Laser Exposure System............................7-1 7.2 Basic Sequence ................................7-3 7.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations (laser exposure system)....................... 7-3 7.2.2 Basic Sequence .................................... 7-3 7.3 Various Controls ................................7-4 7.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing.............................
Page 323: Construction
Chapter 7 7.1 Construction 7.1.1 Outline of the Laser Exposure System 0007-0533 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 The laser exposure system consists of a laser unit (source of laser beams) and a polygon mirror. It scans the photosensitive drum (main scanning direction) to create a latent static image.
Page 324 Chapter 7 Laser A 80µm Laser driver PCB Laser B 8-face mirror Laser unit Collimating lens Laser scanner motor Laser mirror BD PCB BD mirror Photosensitive drum Laser A Laser B 18 pixels (760 µm) F-7-2 T-7-2 Component Description Laser semi-conductor Visible laser light (wave length: 675 nm;...
Page 325: Basic Sequence
Chapter 7 7.2 Basic Sequence 7.2.1 Basic Sequence of Operations (laser exposure system) 0006-9486 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 Image leading edge signal in When the surface temperature of the fixing roller reaches 195˚C, page memory full-speed rotation is stated. (for potential control) Control panel Copy Start 195˚C...
Page 326: Various Controls
Chapter 7 7.3 Various Controls 7.3.1 Controlling the Laser Activation Timing 7.3.1.1 Flow of the BD Signal 0006-9490 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 Clock pulses for the printer Generates sync signals Reads from memory based on this for the printer based sync signal.
Page 327: Controlling Laser Activation
Chapter 7 Clock pulses for the laser B Relay PCB J1714 Image signals for the laser B The laser diode is turned on to suit the image signal. Laser driver PCB 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1106 J1301 Laser B VIDEO-B CLK-B...
Page 328: Controlling The Laser Intensity
Chapter 7 This signal is used to decrease the laser intensity between sheets to prolong the life of the laser. Relay PCB Reset signal per scan. J1714 Laser activation signal for sampling Laser driver PCB 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 J1301 J1107 J1354...
Page 329: Controlling The Laser Scanner Motor
Chapter 7 [1]-1 The intensity is monitored, and a voltage [2]-1 suited to the intensity is fed back. Selects either laser A EEPROM or laser B EEPROM for writing. [1]-2 The output is controlled so that [2]-2 the voltage fed back and the Relay PCB The activation voltage voltage from the EEPROM will...
Page 330 Chapter 7 Relay PCB J1715 When '0', full-speed rotation; when '1', wait state rotation. J761 J763 J503 J762 Laser scanner SP-SEL Drive LM-RDY * motor driver signal Laser scanner LM-ON motor When the motor speed reaches a specific level, '0' When '0', the laser scanner motor turns on.
Page 331: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 7 7.4 Parts Replacement Procedure 7.4.1 Laser Scanner Unit 7.4.1.1 Removing the Laser Unit 0007-2596 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Remove the CCD unit. 2) Remove the reader PCB unit. 3) Remove the 6 screws [1], and detach the laser driver PCB cover [2]. F-7-12 4) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1], and remove the video cable [2];...
Page 332 Chapter 7 [3] [3] F-7-18 F-7-15 6) Remove the 6 mounting screws [1], and detach the laser drive PCB cover [2]. 7.4.1.4 Removing the Laser Unit 0008-8681 iR85+ 1) Remove the left lower cover (4 mounting screws). 2) Remove the left upper cover (9 mounting screws). 3) Remove the upper cover (left) [1] (3 mounting screws [2]).
Page 333: Points To Note When Replacing The Laser Unit
Chapter 7 F-7-22 [3] [3] 4) Mark the position of the BD unit [1] with a scriber for later reference. F-7-21 5) Remove the screw [2], and slide out the BD unit [1] to the front. 7.4.1.5 Points to Note When Replacing the Laser Unit 0008-4353 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory lamp in the control...
Page 334 Chapter 7 F-7-25 4) Mark the position of the BD unit [1] with a scriber for later reference. 5) Remove the screw [2], and slide out the BD unit [1] to the front. F-7-26 6) Disconnect the connector [1], and take out the BD unit [2]. F-7-27 7-12...
Page 335: Chapter 8 Image Formation
Chapter 8 Image Formation...
Page 337 Contents Contents 8.1 Construction ...................................8-1 8.1.1 Outline......................................8-1 8.1.2 Outline of the Image Formation System(iR105) ......................... 8-1 8.1.3 Major Components..................................8-3 8.1.4 Pre-Transfer Exposure LED ................................ 8-4 8.1.5 Pre-Transfer Exposure LED ................................ 8-4 8.1.6 Pre-Transfer Exposure LED ................................ 8-4 8.1.7 Pre-Transfer Exposure LED ................................ 8-5 8.1.8 Addition of the Developing Fan(iR105) ............................
Page 338 Contents 8.7.2.1 Outline .......................................... 8-32 8.7.2.2 Controlling the Output to Suit the Environment (fuzzy control)........................8-32 8.7.2.3 Correcting the Output at the Trailing Edge of Paper ............................ 8-33 8.7.2.4 Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism ............................. 8-34 8.7.2.5 Others..........................................8-35 8.8 Separation Mechanism ..............................8-36 8.8.1 Separation Charging Mechanism...............................
Page 339 Contents 8.9.16.1 Removing the Potential Sensor Unit ................................8-53 8.9.17 Dust-Collecting Roller ................................8-54 8.9.17.1 Removing the Dust-Collecting Roller.................................8-54 8.9.18 Charging Wire..................................8-54 8.9.18.1 Outline.........................................8-54 8.9.18.2 Outline.........................................8-54 8.9.18.3 Removing the Wire Cleaner for the Primary Charging Assembly ......................8-54 8.9.18.4 Removing the Wire Cleaner for the Primary Charging Assembly ......................8-54 8.9.18.5 Stringing the Charging Wire ..................................8-55 8.9.18.6 Stringing the Charging Wire ..................................8-56 8.9.18.7 Stringing the Grid of the Primary Charging Assembly..........................8-56...
Page 341: Construction
Chapter 8 8.1 Construction 8.1.1 Outline 0006-9551 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 Table shows the major functions of the image formation system. T-8-1 Item Pre-exposure Pre-exposure LED array (64 LEDs) ON/OFF control Primary charging DC constant current control (switched among 3 settings in service mode) Grid bias DC constant voltage control (determined by potential control)
Page 342 Chapter 8 Toner cartridge Primary charging assembly Potential sensor Pre-exposure LED Hopper Cleaner unit Developing assembly Dust-collecting roller Pre-transfer charging assembly Pre-transfer exposure LED Transfer guide Separation charging assembly Transfer charging assembly F-8-1 Initial multiple Main Image Trailing Start key Trailing Copying Control panel...
Page 343: Major Components
Chapter 8 Unit/location Changes to GP605 Purpose of change Remarks Reference (iR600) Pre-transfer Added a pre-transfer To improve separation. charging exposure unit. Addition assembly of the Pre- Transfer Exposure Unit Developing Added a developing To cool the developing assembly fan for cooling the assembly.
Page 344: Pre-Transfer Exposure Led
Chapter 8 Toner cartridge Primary charging assembly Potential sensor Pre-exposure LED Hopper Cleaner unit Developing assembly Dust-collecting roller Pre-transfer charging assembly Pre-transfer exposure LED Transfer guide Separation charging assembly Transfer charging assembly F-8-3 8.1.4 Pre-Transfer Exposure LED 0006-9749 iR105i/iR105+ The machine uses a process speed of 500 mm/sec to support a copying speed of 105 pages/min (A4, Direct). To make up for the decrease in charging on the photosensitive drum caused by the increase in the process speed, the machine uses a photosensitive drum with a high degree of charging capacity and a pre-exposure lamp with a short wave length (660 nm), thus ensuring a specific degree of charging.
Page 345: Pre-Transfer Exposure Led
Chapter 8 MEMO: Pre-Transfer Exposure Function: In an initial phase of the transfer process, the charges on the photosensitive drum (background potential) are reduced in advance, thereby weakening the stack bonding between the photosensitive drum and the transfer paper and ultimately encouraging separation. Timing: The LED is turned on 100 msec before the leading edge of an image reaches a specific point until its trailing edge leaves it 8.1.7 Pre-Transfer Exposure LED 0008-8682...
Page 346: Basic Sequence
Chapter 8 8.2 Basic Sequence 8.2.1 Basic Sequence 0008-5822 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 Initial multiple Main Start key Image Trailing Trailing Copying Control panel rotation Leading edge power ON leading edge edge ended power OFF edge started WMUP WMUPR STBY Main motor Drum rotation...
Page 347: Potential Control
Chapter 8 8.3 Potential Control 8.3.1 Outline 0006-9576 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 The potential is controlled for the following: [1] Determining the optimum grid bias. (VD control) [2] Determining the optimum laser output. (VL control) [3] Determining the optimum developing bias (DC). (Vdc control) Figure shows the construction of the control system: Laser light Control...
Page 348: Potential Control
Chapter 8 The charging characteristics are likely to have stabilized at this point, and potential control will not be executed after this point. Potential control is executed 10 min and 60 min after the temperature of the fixing assembly has reached 195˚C. 10 min 60 min Potential...
Page 349: Grid Bias Corrective Control
Chapter 8 The charging characteristics are likely to have stabilized at this point, and potential control will not be executed after this point. Potential control is executed 10 min and 60 min after the temperature of the fixing assembly has reached 195˚C. 10 min 60 min Potential...
Page 350: Determining The Optimum Laser Output
Chapter 8 If an optimum grid bias cannot be selected after measuring the surface potential of the drum several times, a corrective control sequence is started to determine the optimum grid bias. Measurement is continued while varying the level of the grid bias so as to attain the target VD.
Page 351: Determining The Optimum Developing Bias
Chapter 8 Measurement is continued by varying the level of the laser output so as to attain If the measurement is identical to the the target VL. target VL, control is ended. Measurements are taken as many Target VL as 8 times; at times, an approximate (to the target VL) may be used.
Page 352: Target Potential Correction In Each Mode
Chapter 8 corrective corrective corrective value value value +100V Using the target value for transparency mode, potential control sequence is executed. Potential control Transparency potential sequence started control sequence started 200˚C 195˚C WMUP STBY WMUPR VLohp Potential sensor Transparency mode Laser laser power determined Pwohp...
Page 353 Chapter 8 Laser power F value correction correction correction value value value x0.8 Lighter x0.9 The laser power is increased x1.0 (to increase the contrast), thereby enabling reproduction x1.1 of fine lines narrower than a x1.2 single particle of toner.) x1.3 +10V Density...
Page 354: Target Potential Correction In Each Mode
Chapter 8 In a low humidity environment, Laser power the resistance of paper correction correction correction decreases and, on the other value value value hand, the transfer efficiency Lighter Extra low humidity increases; as such, the laser Low humidity power is reduced to prevent Density Normal humidity excess deposit of toner.
Page 355 Chapter 8 1. Potential Control during High Humidity Mode In a low humidity environment, Laser power the resistance of paper correction correction correction decreases and, on the other value value value hand, the transfer efficiency Lighter Extra low humidity increases; as such, the laser Low humidity power is reduced to prevent Density...
Page 356: Charging Mechanism
Chapter 8 8.4 Charging Mechanism 8.4.1 Primary Charging Mechanism 8.4.1.1 Outline 0006-9662 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 The primary charging mechanism is controlled for the following: [1] Primary charging bias constant current [2] Grid bias constant voltage The follouing figure shows the construction of the primary charging control system. The primary charging bias varies as follows according to PR-CNT potential.
Page 357: Others
Chapter 8 When '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the rear. J502A When '1', the wire cleaner moves toward the front. PRWC-RV PRWC-FV PRWC-HP When the wire cleaner reaches the home position, '0'. Wire Home position sensor (MSW4) Primary charging wire cleaning motor (M8) Wire cleaner...
Page 358: Pre-Transfer Charging Mechanism
Chapter 8 The dust-collecting roller bias mechanism is controlled for the following: [1] Turning on and off the dust-collecting roller bias. Figure shows the construction of the dust-collecting roller bias control system. Relay PCB When '1', high-voltage output is ready. 1 2 3 4 J723 J510A...
Page 359: Controlling The Output To Suit The Environment (Fuzzy Control)
Chapter 8 The current level of the pre-transfer bias varies as follows according to the PTDC- CNT potential. 300µA When '1', high-voltage 11V 12V Relay PCB DC output is ready. PTDC-CNT Pre-transfer charging wire J721 1 2 3 4 J723 J510A HVDC-EN When '1',...
Page 360: Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism
Chapter 8 COPIER> OPTION> BODY> FUZZY 0: enable fuzzy control. (default) (fuzzy control ON/OFF) 1: low humidity mode. (The pre-transfer charging current is lower than the standard level.) 2: normal humidity mode. 3: high humidity mode. (The pre-transfer charging current is higher than the standard level.) Selecting '1' through '3' makes the mechanism independent of the environment sensor.
Page 361 Chapter 8 T-8-14 Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> HV-TR> PRE- If you have replaced the DC controller PCB or initialized TR (pre-transfer charging current the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the value on the output adujstment input) service label. T-8-15 Related Error Code E068...
Page 362: Drum Cleaner Unit
Chapter 8 8.5 Drum Cleaner Unit 8.5.1 Outline 0006-9854 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 Figure shows the construction of the drum cleaner unit. Pre-exposure lamp Blade vibration unit Cleaning Blade Magnet roller Waste toner feeding screw Separation claw Main motor F-8-30 The presence of caking toner on the cleaning blade inside the cleaner unit can adversely affect the cleaning of the drum. To prevent caking of toner, the blade of the machine is equipped with 2 blade vibrating units, which vibrate the blade to break and drop cakes of toner, thus preventing drum cleaning faults.
Page 363: Detecting The Waste Toner (Case Full Condition)
Chapter 8 Pre-exposure lamp Cleaning Blade Magnet roller Waste toner feeding screw Separation claw Main motor F-8-32 8.5.3 Detecting the Waste Toner (case full condition) 0006-9856 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 The following figure shows the construction of the control system used to monitor the waste toner case. 8-23...
Page 364 Chapter 8 J514B MM-FG MM-ON M1 Main motor Waste toner lock sensor (MSW2) (front) J514A WT-FULL Waste toner case As toner collects, the case becomes heavy, causing the waste toner case sensor to detect the flag. J512B Waste toner case full sensor (PS19) WT-RCK F-8-33 T-8-16...
Page 365: Developing Assembly
Chapter 8 8.6 Developing Assembly 8.6.1 Outline 0006-9805 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 Figure shows the construction of the developing assembly. Toner cartridge Toner feed motor Toner feed screw (inside cartridge) Hopper Toner sensor Hopper inside toner sensor (TS1) (TS3;...
Page 366: Controlling The Toner Cartridge Drive Mechanism
Chapter 8 J516B J302 Environment sensor PCB When ‘0’, the clutch goes ON. J504B Hopper inside HM(-) toner feed motor HM(+) MGR-CL-ON 24VU Toner feed screw Magnet roller drive clutch J512A When ‘0’, the clutch goes ON. Developing cylinder 24VU DEV-CL-ON Magnet roller Developing cylinder...
Page 367: Controlling The Developing Bias
Chapter 8 Toner feed motor (inside the cartridge) 12 V is applied to turn on the cartridge motor. When the toner cartridge door is closed, '1'. PS59 MSW1 J512B CRGDR-OPN CRGM-ON CRG-DTC Toner cartridge motor drive switch When the door is open, power to the motor is stopped.
Page 368: Detecting The Toner Level And Controlling The Toner Supply Mechanism
Chapter 8 Relay PCB When '1', developing AC bias is generated. AC output 1200 Vpp 1 2 3 4 J721 J510A J723 J732 HVDC_REMOTE DEV_AC_ON Developing cylinder DEV_DC_CNTR The developing DC bias varies as follows according to the DEV_DC_CNTR potential. 500V image area Non-image...
Page 369 Chapter 8 Toner cartridge Toner sensor (TS1; inside the hopper) Purpose: To keep the toner inside the hopper to a specific level. Operation: If the absence of toner is detected, the toner feeding screw inside the toner cartridge is rotated to supply the hopper with toner.
Page 370 Chapter 8 If the toner supply sequence has not ended at the time the machine operation ends, the toner supply sequence will be resumed next time machine operation is started. The toner supply sequence is started The toner supply sequence is when the absence of toner is detected ended if the presence of toner is for 0.3 sec or more.
Page 371: Transfer Mechanism
Chapter 8 8.7 Transfer Mechanism 8.7.1 Transfer Guide Bias 8.7.1.1 Outline 0006-9737 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 To prevent soiling of the surface of the transfer guide with toner (leading to soiled backs), a bias of the same polarity as toner is applied to the transfer guide.
Page 372: Transfer Charging Mechanism
Chapter 8 T-8-20 Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> BODY> 0: switches to +200 V in high humidity. (default) TRNSG-SW 1: fixes the transfer guide bias to +600 V. (transfer guide bias control mode 2: fixes the transfer guide bias to +200 V. switching) 3: switches to +200 V in normal humidity.
Page 373: Correcting The Output At The Trailing Edge Of Paper
Chapter 8 -650 -150 High ß à humidity humidity F-8-45 T-8-21 Related Service Mode COPIER> OPTION> BODY> 0: enable fuzzy control. (default) FUZZY 1: low humidity mode. (The transfer current is lower (fuzzy control ON/OFF) than the standard level.) 2: normal humidity mode. 3: high humidity mode.
Page 374: Transfer Charging Assembly Cleaning Mechanism
Chapter 8 When making a double-sided print, paper will absorb fixing oil and tend to collect less charges (low resistance); since the discharge current along the trailing edge of paper will be low, the output is not varied. In a low humidity environment, paper tends to dry up collecting excess charges (high resistance);...
Page 375: Others
Chapter 8 T-8-23 Timing of Cleaning 1. The surface temperature of the fixing roller is 100 deg C or lower when the control panel power switch is turned on. 2. The wire cleaning mechanism is turned on in user mode. 3.
Page 376: Separation Mechanism
Chapter 8 8.8 Separation Mechanism 8.8.1 Separation Charging Mechanism 8.8.1.1 Outline 0006-9791 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 The separation mechanism is controlled for the following: [1] DC bias constant current [2] AC bias constant current [3] output correction to suit the environment and deposit of toner (fuzzy control) [4] output correction upon detection of leakage Figure shows the construction of the control system for the separation charging mechanism.
Page 377: Correcting The Output Upon Detection Of Leakage
Chapter 8 If the toner deposit is little, the output is increased to prevent separation fault. In a low humidity environment, paper tends to dry up, collecting excess charges (high resistance); as such, the output is decreased. Low toner deposit Average toner deposit High toner deposit Low humidity...
Page 378: Others
Chapter 8 8.8.1.4 Others 0006-9802 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 T-8-28 Related Service Mode If you have replaced the DC controller PCB or COPIER> ADJUST> HV-SP> SP-N1 (output adjustment for single-sided initialized the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter print or 1st side of double-side print;...
Page 379: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 8 8.9 Parts Replacement Procedure 8.9.1 Process Unit 8.9.1.1 Removing the Process Unit 0007-2675 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Remove the developing assembly. 2) Remove the process unit cover. (4 screws). 3) Slide out the fixing/feeder unit. 4) Remove the fixing toner cover; take out the drum protective sheet; and lay it over the fixing/feeder unit.
Page 380: Mounting The Process Unit
Chapter 8 F-8-56 7) While using the drum stop [1] (found inside the compartment behind F-8-59 the front cover) to fix the drum in place, remove the screw [2], and detach the drum fixing block [3]. 8) Detach the drum stopper [1]. 9) Remove the 3 screws [4], and disconnect the connector [5];...
Page 381: Pre-Exposure Lamp
Chapter 8 8.9.1.4 Mounting the Process Unit 0008-9214 / iR85+ / iR8070 Keep the following in mind when mounting the process unit [1] to the slide rail: 1) Be sure to match the notch [2] found at the tip of the left slide rail against the front plate [3] of the process unit.
Page 382: Pre-Transfer Charging Assembly
Chapter 8 4. Do not place the process unit or the photosensitive drum in places subject to dust, ammonium gas, or organic solvent gas. The foregoing points apply to the photosensitive drum of all models. 8.9.5.2 Points to Note When Handling the Photosensitive Drum 0009-0119 The machine's photosensitive drum is made of high-sensitivity...
Page 383 Chapter 8 F-8-68 5) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the drum fixing plate [2]. F-8-71 4) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the positioner holder [2]. F-8-69 F-8-72 6) Remove the screw [1], and detach the bearing stopper [2]; then, shift 5) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the drum fixing plate [2].
Page 384: Drum Cleaner Unit
Chapter 8 8.9.6.3 Removing the Cleaning Blade 0007-2390 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the process unit. 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the reciprocating arm [2]. F-8-74 8.9.6 Drum Cleaner Unit F-8-77 8.9.6.1 Construction 4) Disconnect the connector [3], and remove the five screws [4];...
Page 385: Mounting The Cleaning Blade
Chapter 8 [11] [10] F-8-83 F-8-80 8.9.6.4 Removing the Cleaning Blade 0007-2693 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 The pressure plate looks like the one used for the GP600 Sires or iR8500 Series machines; however, it is a different part with a different parts 1) Slide out the process unit.
Page 386: Removing The Blade Vibrating Unit
Chapter 8 8.9.7 Photosensitive Drum Heater indicated. 8.9.7.1 Replacing the Photosensitive Drum Heater 0007-2047 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Remove the photosensitive drum from the main body. 2) Remove the two mounting screws [1], and detach the flange [2] at the front;...
Page 387: Developing Assembly
Chapter 8 F-8-94 8.9.8.2 Removing the Hopper 0007-2362 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Remove the developing assembly from the machine. 2) Remove the four mounting screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the hopper [3]. F-8-92 Points to Note When Mounting the Flange There is hardly a gap between the flange and the inner side of the drum,...
Page 388 Chapter 8 1) Remove the developing assembly from the machine. 2) Remove the blade unit. 3) Remove the three mounting screws [1] from the rear, and detach the deceleration gear retainer [2]. [13] [12] [11] [10] F-8-100 F-8-97 7) Remove the E-ring [14] and the pressure arm [15] at the front. 4) Remove the three gears [3].
Page 389: Developing Blade
Chapter 8 Points to Note When Mounting the Developing Cylinder Both front and rear sides of the developing assembly and the developing cylinder are equipped with a magnetic seal plate. When mounting the developing cylinder, take care not to bring the magnetic seal plate into contact with the surface of the cylinder to avoid damage.
Page 390: Developing Cylinder Clutch
Chapter 8 4) Remove the heater developing cylinder deceleration clutch [1]. F-8-110 F-8-107 5) Remove the 6 E-rings [1], 2 bearings [2], gear [3], and pin [4]; then, 5) Remove the 6 E-rings [1], 2 bearings [2], gear [3], and pin [4]; then, detach the clutch [5].
Page 391: Transfer/Separation Charging Assembly
Chapter 8 1) Open the front cover. 2) Slide out the fixing/feeding assembly. 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the charging cover [2]. F-8-116 4) Remove the screw [3], and detach the fixing plate [4]; then, F-8-113 disconnect the connector [5], and detach the transfer/separation charging assembly [6].
Page 392: Pre-Transfer Exposure Led
Chapter 8 Boss Boss F-8-119 F-8-121 8.9.14.2 Removing the Pre-Transfer Exposure LED 0008-8174 8.9.14 Pre-Transfer Exposure LED / iR85+ / iR8070 8.9.14.1 Removing the Pre-Transfer Exposure LED 1) Slide out the pre-transfer charging assembly. 0007-2710 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Slide out the pre-transfer charging assembly. When placing the removed pretransfer charging assembly, be sure to take care not to subject the LED to impact.
Page 393: Separation Claw/Separation Claw Drive Assembly
Chapter 8 8.9.15 Separation Claw/Separation Claw Drive Assembly 8.9.16 Potential Sensor 8.9.15.1 Separation Claw/Separation Claw Drive Assembly 8.9.16.1 Removing the Potential Sensor Unit 0007-2395 0007-2052 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Open the front cover. 1) Open the front cover.
Page 394: Dust-Collecting Roller
Chapter 8 As many as 3 charging wires are found around the photosensitive drum (primary, pre-transfer, transfer/separation); these wires are 0.06 mm in diameter. Replace the potential sensor simultaneously with the potential sensor 8.9.18.3 Removing the Wire Cleaner for the Primary PCB.
Page 395: Stringing The Charging Wire
Chapter 8 3) Pick the wire cleaner with small pliers, and free the hook with your 5) Hook the loop on the stud. fingers. 6) Hook the charging wire on the charging wire positioner at the rear, and hook the charging wire tension spring on the charging wire, and twist it.
Page 396: Stringing The Grid Of The Primary Charging Assembly
Chapter 8 11) Mount the wire cleaner. At this time, pay attention to the orientation hook it on the charging wire terminal. In the case of the pre-transfer of the wire cleaner. charging assembly, hook the spring at the front. 12) Wipe the charging wire with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol.
Page 397: Adjusting The Height Of The Charging Wire
Chapter 8 double washers [1], give a 1/2 turn around the screw [2], and secure it in place. F-8-148 2) Loosen the screws [1], [2], [3], [4]; then, tighten the screw [5] to a F-8-150 torque of 1.5 -/+0.2 kg-cm. thereafter, tighten the screws [1], [2], [3], [4] to a torque of 8 kg-cm in the order indicated.
Page 398 Chapter 8 Separation 17.0 ±0.2mm 15.5 ±0.2m Transfer 9.0 ±2.0mm REFERENCE: The height (position) of the primary and transfer charging wires may be adjusted by turning the screw found at the rear of the charging assembly. A full turn of the screw changes the position of the charging wire by about 0.7 mm.
Page 399: Chapter 9 Pickup/Feeding System
Chapter 9 Pickup/Feeding System...
Page 401 Contents Contents 9.1 Construction ...................................9-1 9.1.1 Outline of the Pickup/Feeding System(iR105) ..........................9-1 9.1.2 Specifications and Construction ..............................9-3 9.1.3 Optical Sensors(iR105) ................................9-4 9.1.4 Arrangement of Rollers and Sensors ............................9-4 9.1.5 Arrangement of Rollers and Sensors ............................9-5 9.1.6 Control System.....................................
Page 402 Contents 9.8.3 Copying on the Second Side ..............................9-38 9.8.4 Printing on the Second Side............................... 9-39 9.8.5 Sequence of Operations ................................9-40 9.8.6 Sequence of Operations ................................9-40 9.8.7 Controlling the reversal motor (M11)............................9-40 9.8.8 Controlling the duplexing feeder motor (M12) ......................... 9-41 9.8.9 No-Stacking Operation ................................
Page 403 Contents 9.10.16 Feeding Roller..................................9-69 9.10.16.1 Removing the Feeding Roller ...................................9-69 9.10.16.2 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Deck/Cassette Pickup Assembly ....................9-69 9.10.17 Vertical Path Roller................................9-69 9.10.17.1 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 1/3/4 ..............................9-69 9.10.17.2 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 1/3/4 ..............................9-70 9.10.17.3 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2 ................................9-70 9.10.17.4 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2 ................................9-71 9.10.18 Fixing Feeding Unit Releasing Lever Sensor ........................
Page 405: Construction
Chapter 9 9.1 Construction 9.1.1 Outline of the Pickup/Feeding System(iR105) 0006-9798 iR105 The major changes made to the pickup/feeding system are as follows: - To support the increased speed in the process (500 mm/sec), an optical sensor is used instead of a photointerrupter for the following: right/let deck pickup sensor, right/left feed sensor, cassette 3/4 pickup sensor, vertical path 3/4 sensor.
Page 406 Chapter 9 Unit/location Changes Propose of change Remarks Reference from GP605 (iR600) Registration roller Changed the To use a set screw assembly registration for the joint brake clutch. between shaft and clutch, thereby preventing variation in the leading edge registration during high-speed operation.
Page 407: Specifications And Construction
Chapter 9 Unit/location Changes Propose of change Remarks Reference from GP605 (iR600) Sensor Made to use an To support high- A prism is optical sensor speed operation. mounted in as the right/ the opposite left deck side. pickup sensor. Made to use an optical sensor as the right/ left deck feed...
Page 408: Optical Sensors(Ir105)
Chapter 9 Item Description Paper stacking capacity Paper deck (right, left): 1,500 sheets (80 g/m2) Cassette (3, 4): 550 sheets (80 g/m2) Multifeeder: 50 sheets (80 g/m2) Paper size switch Paper deck (right, left): by the service person Cassette (3, 4): by the user Multifeeder: by the user...
Page 409 Chapter 9 Registration roller Internal delivery roller External delivery roller Multifeeder feeding roller PS10 Delivery auxiliary roller PS16 Reversal auxiliary roller PS11 PS35 PS12 Lower feeding middle roller PS47 Lower feeding PS13 Pre-registration roller Reversing roller PS15 PS14 right roller PS26 PS27 Left deck...
Page 410: Control System
Chapter 9 External delivery roller Internal delivery roller Registration roller PS10 Multifeeder feeding roller Delivery auxiliary roller Reversal auxiliary PS11 PS35 roller PS12 PS60 Lower feeding Lower middle roller feeding PS47 Pre-registration Reversing roller PS14 PS15 right roller roller PS61 PS26 PS27 U-turn roller 2...
Page 411: Index Paper Attachment
Chapter 9 Pickup motor C1 feed detection signal (PS27S) J511-B11 J502-B5 Vertical path 1 paper detection signal (PS47S) J509-A2 Registration assembly detection signal (PS5S) J509-A4 Registration clutch drive signal (CL2D) Pre-registration roller clutch drive signal (CL5D) J513-A13 J519-B3 Lower feeder right roller clutch drive signal (CL17D) J519-B4 Lower feeder middle roller clutch drive signal (CL16D) J519-B9...
Page 412: Controlling The Pickup Motor (M2)
Chapter 9 Index paper attachment Index sheets Fixing sheet Backing F-9-5 9.1.8 Controlling the Pickup Motor (M2) 0007-0204 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 Table shows the functions of the pickup motor control circuit, and Figure is a block diagram of the circuit. T-9-5 Item Description...
Page 413: Basic Sequence
Chapter 9 9.2 Basic Sequence 9.2.1 Right Deck 0007-0200 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 - A4, 2 Sheets, Continuous The copier's deck pickup assembly uses separation rollers to separate paper. Copy Start key ON or print command received 1st sheet picked up 2nd sheet picked up Pickup motor (M2) Right deck...
Page 414: Pickup From The Cassette 4
Chapter 9 Print command 1st sheet picked up received 2nd sheet picked up Pickup motor (M2) Right deck pickup clutch (CL10) Right deck pickup solenoid (SL7) Right deck pickup paper sensor (PS20) Vertical path roller 1 paper sensor (PS47) Registration roller paper sensor (PS5) Registration roller clutch (CL2)
Page 415: Pickup From The Cassette 4
Chapter 9 9.2.4 Pickup from the cassette 4 0008-8985 iR85+ - A4, 2 Sheets, Continuous, cassette 4 The machine's cassette pickup assembly uses separation rollers. Print command 1st sheet picked up received 2nd sheet picked up Pickup motor (M2) Cassette 4 pickup clutch (CL14) Cassette 4 pickup solenoid (SL10)
Page 416: Detecting Jams
Chapter 9 9.3 Detecting Jams 9.3.1 Jam Detection Outline 9.3.1.1 Outline 0007-0559 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 Arrangement of Jam Sensors PS10 PS11 PS35 PS12 PS60 PS47 PS14 PS15 PS61 PS26 PS27 PS20 PS25 PS49 PS41 PS37 PS46 PS42 F-9-11 Type of Jams T-9-6 Sensor Delay jam...
Page 417: Outline
Chapter 9 Sensor Delay jam Stationary Stationary jam from power-on Fixing feeding outlet sensor PS11 Absent Absent Present Duplexing reversal sensor PS12 Present Present Present Duplex outlet sensor PS61 Present Present Present Pre-confluence sensor PS14 Present Present Present Post-confluence sensor PS15 Present Present...
Page 418: Delay Jams
Chapter 9 Sensor Delay jam Stationary jam Stationary jam from power-on Duplexing reversal sensor PS12 Present Present Present U-turn sensor PS13 Present Present Present Pre-confluence sensor PS14 Present Present Present Post-confluence sensor PS15 Present Present Present 9.3.2 Delay Jams 9.3.2.1 Cassette Pickup (Right deck, Left deck, cassette 3, 4) 0007-0561 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 A specific time I after the pickup clutch turns...
Page 419: Other Delay Jams
Chapter 9 A specific time I after the pickup clutch turns on, a jam check starts. Print command INTR PRINT Pickup clutch (LC10, 11, 12, 13) Pickup solenoid (SL7, 8, 9, 10) 0.13 sec 0.13 sec Jam check Pickup sensor Normal Error (PS20, 25, 37, 42)
Page 420: Other Delay Jams
Chapter 9 A specific time I after the leading edge Copy Start key of paper is detected by the sensor N-1, ON or a jam check is started. PRINT set INTR PRINT Sensor N-1 0.13 sec 0.13 sec Jam check Normal Error Sensor N...
Page 421: Other Delay Jams
Chapter 9 A specific time I after the leading edge Copy Start key of paper is detected by the sensor N-1, ON or a jam check is started. PRINT set INTR PRINT Sensor N-1 0.13 sec 0.13 sec Jam check Normal Error Sensor N...
Page 422: Stationary Jams
Chapter 9 A specific time I after the leading edge of paper is detected by the sensor N-1, a jam check is started. Print command INTR PRINT Sensor N-1 0.13 sec 0.13 sec Jam check Normal Error Sensor N A check is made for about 0.13 A delay jam is identified if sec to find out if paper has paper does not reach the...
Page 423: Stationary Jam At Power-On
Chapter 9 A jam check is started after feeding "paper Copy Start key length + 40 mm" upon detection of the ON or leading edge of paper. PRINT set INTR PRINT L + 40mm L + 40mm Jam check Normal Error Sensor N (L = paper length)
Page 424: Cassette Pick-Up Unit
Chapter 9 9.4 Cassette Pick-Up Unit 9.4.1 Outline 0007-0206 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 When the deck or the cassette is slid in, the cassette open/closed sensor turns on and, at the same time, the pickup roller starts to move down, causing the light-blocking plate to leave the lifter sensor, driving the cassette lifter motor and, ultimately, moving up the lifter.
Page 425: Detecting The Presence/Absence Of Paper
Chapter 9 Pickup sensor Pickup roller Feeding roller Paper Separation roller Pickup roller Lifter position sensor Lifter Paper sensor Cassette open/ closed sensor F-9-21 9.4.2 Detecting the Presence/Absence of Paper 0007-0216 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 The presence/absent of paper inside the deck and the cassette is detected by the cassette paper sensor. Paper sensor Paper detecting lever Paper...
Page 426: Detecting The Level Of Paper
Chapter 9 9.4.3 Detecting the Level of Paper 0007-0231 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 The machine indicates the level of paper inside the deck and the cassette in four readings (including No Paper) on the control panel. F-9-24 T-9-14 3 bars 100% to about 50% of capacity...
Page 427: Cassette 3/4
Chapter 9 In the case of cassette 3/4, the resistance of the variable resistor operating in conjunction with the movement of the lifter drive shaft is used to find out the level of paper. DC controller PCB Variable resistor Paper level (much) Variable resistor Paper level (little)
Page 428: Markings On The Width Guide Rail
Chapter 9 T-9-17 Cassette 3 Cassette 4 Length detection SV1 (2 photointerrupers) SV2 (2 photointerrupers) Width detection SVR3 9.4.5 Markings on the Width Guide Rail 0007-0316 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 The width guide rail inside the cassette is equipped with paper size positioning holes, which are marked A through M as shown in Table. Refer to these markings if the user reports skew movement of paper, thereby deciding whether the paper width is set correctly.
Page 429 Chapter 9 Group Size G-LTR K-LGL FOOLSCAP OFFICIO E-OFFI A-LGL A-OFFI G-LGL FOLIO AUS-FLS A-LTR F-9-29 T-9-19 Related Service Mode * Factory setting. COPIER> OPTION> CST> CST-U1 31: GLTR *, 22: KLGL COPIER> OPTION> CST> CST-U2 24: FLSC *, 26: OFI, 27: E-OFI, 33: A-LGL, 36: A-OFI COPIER>...
Page 430 Chapter 9 Paper Notation Size (verticalxhorizontal; mm) Ecuadorian OFFICIO E-OFI (220 -/+ 1)x(320 -/+ 1) Bolivian OFFICIO B-OFI (216 -/+ 1)x(355 -/+ 1) Argentine LTR A-LTR (280 -/+ 1)x(220 -/+ 1) Argentine LTRR A-LTRR (220 -/+ 1)x(280 -/+ 1) Government LTR G-LTR (267 -/+ 1)x(203 -/+ 1) Government LTRR...
Page 431: Manual Feed Pickup Unit
Chapter 9 9.5 Manual Feed Pickup Unit 9.5.1 Pickup Operation 0007-0419 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 T-9-22 Pickup drive: pickup motor (M2) Pickup roller contro: manual feed tray pickup clutch (CL7) manual feed tray pickup solenoid (SL6) Paper feed detection: manual feed sensor (PS35) DC controller PCB Pickup...
Page 432 Chapter 9 Side guide (rear) Manual feed tray Variable registration(SVR1) Side guide (front) DC controller PCB F-9-31 T-9-23 Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> MF-A4R Use it to change the paper width basic value for A4R on the manual feed tray. COPIER>...
Page 433: Deck
Chapter 9 9.6 Deck 9.6.1 Outline 0007-0210 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 When the deck or the cassette is slid in, the cassette open/closed sensor turns on and, at the same time, the pickup roller starts to move down, causing the light-blocking plate to leave the lifter sensor, driving the cassette lifter motor and, ultimately, moving up the lifter.
Page 434: Lifter Limiter (Deck Right/Left)
Chapter 9 Pickup sensor Pickup roller Feeding roller Paper Separation roller Pickup roller Lifter position sensor Lifter Paper sensor Cassette open/ closed sensor F-9-33 9.6.2 Lifter Limiter (deck right/left) 0007-0213 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 When the lifter moves up and the surface of paper reaches the cassette limit sensor, the drive to the lifter motor stops. 9-30...
Page 435: Detecting The Presence/Absence Of Paper
Chapter 9 DC controller PCB J514 Motor drive circuit J511 (PS24) Deck right limit sensor When the limit signal is received, Motor drive signal the motor drive signal is stopped. DC controller PCB J514 Motor drive circuit J518 (PS34) Deck left limit sensor When the lift signal is received, Motor drive signal...
Page 436: Detecting The Level Of Paper
Chapter 9 Paper sensor Paper detecting lever Lifter F-9-36 9.6.4 Detecting the Level of Paper 0007-0218 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 The machine indicates the level of paper inside the deck and the cassette in four readings (including No Paper) on the control panel. F-9-37 T-9-25 3 bars...
Page 437 Chapter 9 DC controller PCB Paper level Paper level Paper level (100% to (about 50% (about 10% about 50%) to about 10%) or less) F-9-38 T-9-26 Deck right Deck left Paper level [1] Sensor [2] Sensor Sensor [1] Sensor [2] Sensor Sensor (PS51) (PS52)
Page 438: Cassette Deck Right/Left
Chapter 9 DC controller PCB Variable resistor Paper level (much) Variable resistor Paper level (little) F-9-39 T-9-27 Related Service Mode COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C3-LVOL Reading when 50 sheets exit in the cassette 3 COPIER> ADJUST> CST-ADJ> C3-HVOL Reading when 275 sheets exist in the cassette 3 COPIER>...
Page 439: Registration Unit
Chapter 9 9.7 Registration Unit 9.7.1 Outline 0007-0439 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 T-9-29 Registration clutch Registration clutch drive signal CL2D Registration brake clutch Registration brake clutch drive signal CL3D Shift clutch activation timing service mode 9.7.2 Control System 0007-0451 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 Registration roller...
Page 440 Chapter 9 Registration clutch (CL2) Registration brake clutch (CL3) 50 msec (approx.) Pre-registration clutch (CL5) Pre-registration brake clutch (CL6) 146 msec (approx.) 146 msec (approx.) Note: If paper stops for a long time before the registration roller, • ADF original processing time •...
Page 441: Duplex Feeding Unit
Chapter 9 9.8 Duplex Feeding Unit 9.8.1 Copying on the First Side 0007-0463 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 DC controller PCB PS10 PS16 PS11 Reversal motor SL11 PS12 Lower feeder motor F-9-42 9.8.2 Printing on the First Side 0008-8989 iR85+ 9-37...
Page 442: Copying On The Second Side
Chapter 9 DC controller PCB PS10 PS16 PS11 Reversal motor SL11 PS12 Lower feeder motor F-9-43 9.8.3 Copying on the Second Side 0007-0467 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 9-38...
Page 443: Printing On The Second Side
Chapter 9 Reversal motor SL11 PS12 PS13 PS14 PS15 Lower feeder motor Pickup motor DC controller PCB F-9-44 9.8.4 Printing on the Second Side 0008-8990 iR85+ Reversal motor SL11 PS12 PS13 PS14 PS15 Lower feeder motor Pickup motor DC controller PCB F-9-45 9-39...
Page 444: Sequence Of Operations
Chapter 9 9.8.5 Sequence of Operations 0007-0472 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 A4, 4 Originals, Double-Sided Copies Original set in ADF Copy Start key ON or print count set Copying on face of 1st sheet Copying on back of 2nd sheet Copying on face of 2nd sheet Coping on back of 1st sheet Pickup motor (M 2) Internal paper sensor (PS 9)
Page 445: Controlling The Duplexing Feeder Motor (M12)
Chapter 9 Item Description Error detection No error code; however, if a fault in the drive of the motor, a jam will occur. When the M11 drive signal goes '1', the pickup motor starts to rotate. When the M11 drive signal goes '0', the pickup motor stops.
Page 446: No-Stacking Operation
Chapter 9 When the M12 drive signal goes '1', the pickup motor starts to rotate. When the M15 drive signal goes '0', the pickup motor stops. DC controller No-stacking feeding +24V driver PCB +24V J519 J3602 J3603 DUPF-OFF Interface circuit DUPF-B Interface Motor...
Page 447 Chapter 9 F-9-51 3. The 3rd side is printed on the 2nd sheet. The 1st sheet is moved to the holding tray assembly. The 3rd sheet is picked up. F-9-52 4. The 1st sheet is moved to the reversing assembly. F-9-53 5.
Page 448 Chapter 9 F-9-54 6. The 1st sheet is re-picked up from the lower feeding assembly. F-9-55 7. The 2nd side is printed on the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is kept in wait, and the 4th sheet is picked up. F-9-56 8.
Page 449 Chapter 9 F-9-57 9. The 4th side is printed on the 2nd sheet, and the 3rd sheet is kept in wait in the lower feeding assembly. The 5th sheet is picked up. F-9-58 10. The 2nd sheet is discharged. The 9th side is printed on the 5th sheet. F-9-59 11.
Page 450 Chapter 9 F-9-60 12. The 3rd sheet is discharged. F-9-61 13. The 8th side is printed on the 4th sheet. F-9-62 14. The 4th sheet is discharged, and the 10th side is printed on the 5th sheet. F-9-63 9-46...
Page 451: No-Stacking Operation
Chapter 9 15. The 5th sheet is discharged. F-9-64 9.8.10 No-Stacking Operation 0009-1605 iR85+ In no-stacking operation, paper after fixing is moved to the holding tray assembly by the delivery flapper and the reversing flapper and, then, is moved to the lower feeding assembly.
Page 452 Chapter 9 F-9-66 3. The 3rd side is printed on the 2nd sheet. The 1st sheet is moved to the holding tray assembly. The 3rd sheet is picked up. F-9-67 4. The 1st sheet is moved to the reversing assembly. F-9-68 5.
Page 453 Chapter 9 F-9-69 6. The 1st sheet is re-picked up from the lower feeding assembly. F-9-70 7. The 2nd side is printed on the 1st sheet. The 2nd sheet is kept in wait, and the 4th sheet is picked up. F-9-71 8.
Page 454 Chapter 9 F-9-72 9. The 4th side is printed on the 2nd sheet, and the 3rd sheet is kept in wait in the lower feeding assembly. The 5th sheet is picked up. F-9-73 10. The 2nd sheet is discharged. The 9th side is printed on the 5th sheet. F-9-74 11.
Page 455 Chapter 9 F-9-75 12. The 3rd sheet is discharged. F-9-76 13. The 8th side is printed on the 4th sheet. F-9-77 14. The 4th sheet is discharged, and the 10th side is printed on the 5th sheet. F-9-78 9-51...
Page 456: Detecting The Horizontal Registration Position
Chapter 9 15. The 5th sheet is discharged. F-9-79 9.8.11 Detecting the Horizontal Registration Position 0007-0531 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 T-9-35 Paper position detection By the horizontal registration sensor (PS18) Detection start timing By the post-confluence sensor (PS15) Drive By the horizontal registration motor (M15) Position measurement...
Page 457: Controlling The Horizontal Registration Motor (M15)
Chapter 9 The position of paper is detected with reference to the start position and by finding out the difference between the start position and the actual paper position from the number of drive pulses (1 pulse = about 0.16 mm) of the motor. Main power switch ON Start position Paper position detection...
Page 458 Chapter 9 When the M15 drive signal goes '1', the pickup motor starts to rotate. When the M15 drive signal goes '0', the pickup motor is held in stop state. +24V No-stacking feeding DC controller driver PCB +24V J519 J3602 J3603 SREJI-HOLD Interface...
Page 459: Delivery
Chapter 9 9.9 Delivery 9.9.1 Reversal Delivery 0007-0546 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 The copier discharges paper either in face-up delivery or in face-down delivery mode. T-9-37 Delivery Copying operation Face-up - Making multiple copies of a single original. - Making copies on transparencies (However, the images will be mirror images.) Face-down - Other than above...
Page 460 Chapter 9 One-way clutch Main Gear for delivery motor tray spec (slower with finisher spec) Delivery flapper solenoid CL21 SL11 Reversing Reversing assembly flapper solenoid Delivery speed switching clutch Reversal motor F-9-84 T-9-39 Parts (notation) Description Main motor (M1) Drives the feeding roller. Delivery flapper solenoid (SL3) Delivery speed switching clutch (CL21) Turns on in reversal delivery mode to speed up the...
Page 461: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 9 9.10 Parts Replacement Procedure 9.10.1 Cassette Pickup Assembly 9.10.1.1 Removing the Cassette 3 Pickup Assembly 0007-1247 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Slide out the deck. 2) Open the upper right cover and the lower right cover. The pickup assembly cannot be removed unless the deck has been removed (the lifter will get trapped).
Page 462: Front Deck Pickup Assembly
Chapter 9 9.10.3.2 Removing the Pickup Assembly of the Front 2) Remove the front lower right cover of the cassette assembly as instructed under "Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2." Deck (left) 3) Remove the two fixing screws [1] of the lifter motor (M16/M17), and disconnect the connector [2];...
Page 463: Left Deck Pickup Sensor
Chapter 9 9.10.4 Left Deck Pickup Sensor 9.10.4.1 Removing the Left Deck Pickup Sensor 0007-4275 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Remove the front deck (left) pickup assembly. 2) Remove the screw [1], and detach the pickup sensor unit [2]. F-9-96 3) Remove the screw [1], and detach the stack eliminator [2]. 4) Remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the pickup assembly sensor base [4].
Page 464: Fitting The Side Guide Timing Belt For The Manual Feed Tray Assembly(Ir105)
Chapter 9 9.10.6.4 Fitting the Side Guide Timing Belt for the Manual 5) Remove the screw [4], and detach the connector cover [5]. 6) Disconnect the connector [6], and detach the manual feed tray unit [1] Feed Tray Assembly upward while it is kept open at about 90 deg. 0008-8180 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Butt the rack plate [1] of the manual feed tray against section A (in...
Page 465: Manual Feed Roller
Chapter 9 Direction of rotation front of Collar (silver) the machine F-9-104 F-9-107 9.10.8.2 Orientation of the Feeding Roller Direction of rotation 0007-1274 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 When mounting the feeding roller [6] to the manual feed tray pickup assembly, be sure that the belt pulley [7] and the round marking [8] are toward the machine's front.
Page 466: Mounting The Manual Feed Roller
Chapter 9 When mounting the manual feed roller, hook the two claws of the rear fixing plate 2 on the three holes in the rear side plate; then, mount the rear fixing plate 1 to secure. 3) Secure the front fixing plate [4] with two screws [5]. F-9-110 4) Remove the E-ring [7], spacer [8], and bearing [9] at both front and rear;...
Page 467: Manual Feed Tray Sensor
Chapter 9 Urethane sponge pieces F-9-115 F-9-118 6) Open the manual feed tray. 9.10.10 Manual Feed Tray sensor 7) Remove the 11 mounting screws [1], and detach the manual feed tray pickup assembly [2]. 9.10.10.1 Removing the Manual Feed Tray Paper Sensor 0007-2791 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Open the manual feed tray unit, and remove the door tape from the...
Page 468 Chapter 9 F-9-122 11) Remove the 2 mounting screws [2] of the sensor unit [1]. F-9-125 3) Disconnect the connector [1]. 4) Remove heater mounting screw [2], and detach the pickup roller releasing solenoid [3] together with the support plate. F-9-123 12) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the sensor unit [2].
Page 469: Registration Roller
Chapter 9 F-9-132 12) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the sensor unit [2]. 13) Remove the sensor [3] from the sensor unit [2]. F-9-128 8) Remove the 2 mounting screws [1], and detach the upper guide plate [2]. F-9-133 9.10.11 Registration Roller 9.10.11.1 Removing the Registration Roller F-9-129...
Page 470: Pre-Registration Roller
Chapter 9 F-9-135 6) Remove the registration clutch. 7) Remove the spring [6], E-ring [7], spacer [8], and bushing [9] at the rear; then, detach the registration roller [10]. F-9-137 [10] 2) Remove the screw [5], and detach the front fixing plate [6]; then, detach the preregistration roller assembly [7].
Page 471: Registration Clutch
Chapter 9 [10] F-9-142 [13] [12] [11] When mounting the registration clutch, be sure to hook the clutch stop [A] on the protrusion [B] of the clutch cover. F-9-139 9.10.13.2 Removing the Registration Clutch 5) Perform steps 3) and 4) for the rear; then, detach the pre-registration roller assembly.
Page 472: Registration Brake Clutch
Chapter 9 F-9-145 F-9-147 When mounting the registration clutch, be sure to hook the clutch stop 9.10.15 Fixing/Feed Unit [A] on the protrusion [B] of the clutch cover. 9.10.15.1 Removing the Fixing/Feed Unit 9.10.14 Registration Brake Clutch 0007-2877 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 9.10.14.1 Removing the Registration Brake Clutch 1) Slide out the fixing/feed unit.
Page 473: Feeding Roller
Chapter 9 9.10.15.2 Removing the Fixing/Feed Unit [1] [2] [4] [5] [3] 0008-8190 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Slide out the fixing/feed unit. 2) Remove the 2 stepped screws [1]. F-9-152 9.10.16.2 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Deck/ Cassette Pickup Assembly 0007-1281 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070...
Page 474: Removing The Vertical Path Roller 2
Chapter 9 F-9-155 F-9-158 4) Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the bearing [2] to detach the 4) Remove the E-ring [1], and remove the bearing [2] to detach the vertical path roller [3]. vertical path roller [3]. F-9-156 F-9-159 9.10.17.2 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 1/3/4 9.10.17.3 Removing the Vertical Path Roller 2 0008-8182...
Page 475: Fixing Feeding Unit Releasing Lever Sensor
Chapter 9 F-9-161 F-9-164 4) Remove the E-ring [1] at the front of the roller shaft, and move the 4) Remove the E-ring [1] at the front of the roller shaft, and move the bearing [2] toward the inside; then, detach the vertical path roller 2 bearing [2] toward the inside;...
Page 476: Duplexing Unit
Chapter 9 [13] [14] [12] [11] [10] F-9-167 F-9-170 4) Remove the two screws [4], and detach the fixing feeding unit 7) Remove the feeding belt unit [15], and detach the feeding belt [16] releasing lever support plate [5]. and the postcard belt [17]. [16] [17] [16]...
Page 477: Removing The Reversal Motor
Chapter 9 Take care not to trap your hand between the grip and the rail. Do not place the duplexing unit where it is subjected to damage. 9.10.20.2 Removing the Reversal Motor 0008-8187 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Remove the front cover of the duplexing unit. 2) Disconnect he two connectors [1], and remove the four screws [2] then, detach the reversal motor[3] together with the motor support plate [4].
Page 478: Removing The Reversing Flapper Solenoid
Chapter 9 9.10.20.6 Removing the Reversing Flapper Solenoid 0007-1416 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Remove the duplexing unit from the main body. 2) Remove the two screws [1], and disconnect the connector [2]; then, detach the reversing flapper solenoid [3]. F-9-180 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and free the claw to detach the left deck feed sensor [2].
Page 479: Removing The Deck (Left) Draw- Out Clutch/Lower Feeder Middle Clutch
Chapter 9 F-9-185 4) Remove the bearing [4] and spacer [5]; then, detach the lower feeding right clutch [6]. F-9-183 9.10.20.10 Removing the Deck (left) Draw- Out Clutch/ Lower Feeder Middle Clutch 0007-1424 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Remove the duplexing unit from the main body.
Page 480: Removing The Front Deck (Lifter) Draw-Out Sensor
Chapter 9 F-9-190 9.10.20.15 Removing the Horizontal Registration Sensor F-9-188 0007-1458 2) Disconnect the connector [3]; then, remove the screw [4], and detach iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 the postconfluence sensor [5]. 1) Remove the duplexing unit from the main body. 2) Remove the front cover.
Page 481: Separation Roller
Chapter 9 Urethane sponge pieces F-9-197 F-9-193 9.10.21.2 Orientation of the Separation Roller 9.10.21 Separation Roller 0007-1297 9.10.21.1 Removing the Separation Roller iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 0007-1291 Keep the following in mind when replacing the separation roller. iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 Narrower groove Wider groove...
Page 483: Chapter 10 Fixing System
Chapter 10 Fixing System...
Page 485 Contents Contents 10.1 Construction ................................10-1 10.1.1 Outline...................................... 10-1 10.1.2 Outline...................................... 10-1 10.1.3 Outline...................................... 10-1 10.1.4 Outline...................................... 10-2 10.1.5 Major Components................................... 10-2 10.1.6 Fixing Drive System Outline ..............................10-3 10.1.7 Controlling the Fixing Roller Drive Mechanism ........................10-4 10.1.8 Controlling the Cleaning Belt Drive Mechanism ........................10-5 10.1.9 Controlling the Thermistor Reciprocating Mechanism ......................
Page 486 Contents 10.5.5.2 Removing the Internal Delivery Roller ..............................10-26 10.5.6 Main Thermistor ..................................10-26 10.5.6.1 Removing the Main Thermistor................................10-26 10.5.6.2 Removing the Main Thermistor................................10-27 10.5.6.3 Mounting the Main Thermistor................................. 10-27 10.5.6.4 Mounting the Main Thermistor................................. 10-27 10.5.7 Sub Thermistor..................................10-27 10.5.7.1 Removing the Sub Thermistor ..................................
Page 487: Construction
Chapter 10 10.1 Construction 10.1.1 Outline 0008-6185 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 Table shows the major functions of the fixing system. T-10-1 Component Notation Description Fixing upper roller Heat roller, 60-mm dia. Fixing lower roller Pressure roller, 50-mm dia. Fixing motor DC motor, 33 W Main heater 200V model: 1150 W 208V model: 1220 W...
Page 488: Outline
Chapter 10 T-10-3 Component Notation Description Fixing upper roller Heat roller, 60-mm dia. Fixing lower roller Pressure roller, 50-mm dia. Fixing motor DC motor, 33 W Main heater 100V model: 1000 W 208V model: 900 W 230V model: 900 W Sub heater 100V model: 400 W 208V model: 600 W...
Page 489: Fixing Drive System Outline
Chapter 10 Web locking roller Cleaning web unit Cleaning web Fixing upper roller Main thermistor (TH1) Sub thermistor (TH2) Separation claw Thermal switch (TP1) Inlet guide Fixing lower roller F-10-1 Fixing upper roller Sub thermistor (TH2) Main thermistor (TH1) Thermal switch (TP1) F-10-2 10.1.6 Fixing Drive System Outline 0007-0643...
Page 490: Controlling The Fixing Roller Drive Mechanism
Chapter 10 Indicates that the cleaning Issues an error upon belt is running out on the detection. control panel upon detection. J508B Detection signal Detection signal Web absent Cleaning belt drive solenoid warning sensor Drive signal Web absent sensor Drive signal Thermistor Main motor Upper...
Page 491: Controlling The Cleaning Belt Drive Mechanism
Chapter 10 T-10-5 Related Error Code E014 FXM-LCK is '1' for more than 2 sec while the motor is (fixing motor speed error) rotating (i.e., FXM-ON=1). 10.1.8 Controlling the Cleaning Belt Drive Mechanism 0007-0650 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 Figure shows the construction of the control system used to control the cleaning belt drive mechanism.
Page 492: Controlling The Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating Mechanism
Chapter 10 (front) Reciprocating width: 12 mm One-way clutch Upper fixing roller Cleaning belt drive belt solenoid (SL2) (rear) Main thermistor F-10-6 10.1.10 Controlling the Upper Separation Claw Reciprocating Mechanism 0007-0659 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 Figure shows the control system used to control the reciprocating mechanism of the uppers separation claw. Reciprocating width: 3 mm (rear) Upper separation claw unit...
Page 493: Basic Sequence
Chapter 10 10.2 Basic Sequence 10.2.1 Basic Sequence 0008-6186 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 200V: 185ºC 200V: 190ºC Main power 208V/230V: 208V/230V: Start key switch ON 195ºC 200ºC WMUP WMUPR LSTR STBY STBY INTR PSTBY PRINT Wait message GREEN Fixing motor (M3) Main heater (H1) Sub heater (H2) 200V: controlled to 188ºC...
Page 494 Chapter 10 Print request Main power command switch ON 190˚C 198˚C WAIT WMUP WMUPR STBY INTR PSTBY PRINT LSTR STBY indicator Green Fixing motor (M3) Main heater (H1) Sub heater (H2) Controlled to 198˚C Controlled to 198˚C 200˚C 198˚C 195˚C 190˚C Passage of paper To recover to 198˚C in a...
Page 495: Various Control Mechanisms
Chapter 10 10.3 Various Control Mechanisms 10.3.1 Controlling the Fixing Roller Temperature 10.3.1.1 Down Sequence Control 0006-9880 iR105i/iR105+ Start key STBY PRINT STOP PRINT Main heater (H1) Sub heater (H2) Copying speed 105cpm 86cpm 74cpm Suspend 105cpm 200V:controlled to 190ºC 208V/230V:controlled to 200ºC Sub heater turned ON to return to specific temperature...
Page 496: Down Sequence Control
Chapter 10 Start key STBY PRINT STOP PRINT Main heater (H1) Sub heater (H2) Copying speed 90cpm 73.7cpm 63.4cpm Suspend 90cpm Controlled to 200ºC Sub heater turned ON to return to specific temperature 200ºC 195ºC 190ºC 185ºC 180ºC 175ºC 170ºC 165ºC 160ºC At 178ºC, dropped...
Page 497: Down Sequence Control
Chapter 10 Start key STBY PRINT STOP PRINT Main heater (H1) Sub heater (H2) Copy speed 80cpm 65.9cpm 56.5cpm Interrupt 80cpm Controlled to 198˚C The sub heater is also turned on for recovery of temperature. 198˚C 193˚C 188˚C 183˚C 178˚C 173˚C 168˚C 165˚C...
Page 498: Fixing Temperature Control(Ir105)
Chapter 10 Start key STBY PRINT STOP PRINT Main heater (H1) Sub heater (H2) Copy speed 85cpm 70cpm 60cpm Interrupt 85cpm Controlled to 198˚C The sub heater is also turned on for recovery of temperature. 198˚C 193˚C 188˚C 183˚C 178˚C 173˚C 168˚C 165˚C...
Page 499: Transparency Mode
Chapter 10 200V: 185ºC 200V: 190ºC Main power Control panel 208V/230V: 208V/230V: Start key switch ON switch ON 195ºC 200ºC SLEEP WMUP WMUPR LSTR STBY STBY INTR PSTBY PRINT Wait message GREEN Fixing motor (M3) Main heater (H1) Sub heater (H2) 200V: controlled to 188ºC 200V: controlled to 188ºC 208V/230V: controlled to 198ºC...
Page 500: Transparency Mode
Chapter 10 Transparency mode selected Start key ON 193˚C STBY INTR PRINT LSTR STBY WAIT mode Green Green Fixing motor (M3) Controlled to Main heater 193˚C (H1) Controlled to Controlled to 198˚C 198˚C Sub heater (H2) Idle rotation continued until the surface temperature of the fixing roller decreases to that used for transparencies.
Page 501: Thick Paper Mode
Chapter 10 COPIER> OPTION> BODY> OHP-TEMP (changing the temperature settings for the transparency mode) 0: 198 deg C (default) 1: 193 deg C 2: 188 deg C 3: 183 deg C 10.3.1.9 Thick Paper Mode 0006-9853 iR105i/iR105+ To prevent drops in the surface temperature of the fixing roller occurring when thick paper moves past it, the down sequence shift temperature increased. If thick paper is selected when registering paper type in user mode (common settings), the down sequence for thick mode will be executed.
Page 502: Thick Paper Mode
Chapter 10 Setting 65.9cpm 56.5cpm Suspend Resume 184 deg C 183 deg C 173 deg C 188 deg C 10.3.1.12 Thick Paper Mode 0008-9460 To prevent drops in the surface temperature of the fixing roller occurring when thick paper moves past it, the down sequence shift temperature increased. If thick paper is selected when registering paper type in user mode (common settings), the down sequence for thick mode will be executed.
Page 503 Chapter 10 WMUPR omitted Power save mode Power Save Power Save 200V: 185ºC 200V: 190ºC set in user mode key ON key OFF 208V/230V: 195ºC 208V/230V: 200ºC STBY SLEEP WMUP STBY Main heater (H1) Sub heater (H2) 200V: controlled to 190ºC 200V: controlled to 190ºC 208V/230V: controlled to 200ºC 208V/230V: controlled to 200ºC...
Page 504: Protective Functions
Chapter 10 10.4 Protective Functions 10.4.1 Detecting an Error 0006-9869 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 The following errors are detected in relation to fixing temperature control: 1. temperature control error by main thermistor (TH1) 2. sensor error by sub thermistor (TH2) 3. overheating error by thermal switch (TP1) Voltage suited to Voltage suited to reading of sub thermistor...
Page 505 Chapter 10 Voltage according to the reading of the main thermistor J508B Voltage according to the reading of the sub thermistor M-TEMP S-TEMP Upper fixing roller Sub thermistor Main heater Main thermistor J505A Sub heater Thermal switch Turns off the AC MHDTC line at 228˚C.
Page 506: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 10 10.5 Parts Replacement Procedure 4) Remove the two screws [6], pre-transfer charging assembly cover [7], and fixing roller knob [8]; then, remove the two screws [9], and detach the fixing/feeding unit cover [10]. 10.5.1 Fixing Unit 10.5.1.1 Removing the Fixing Assembly 0007-1467 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Slide the fixing/feeding unit halfway out the main body.
Page 507: Upper Fixing Roller
Chapter 10 [15] [17] [14] F-10-29 6) Open the fixing upper unit [1]. [16] F-10-27 F-10-30 10.5.2 Upper Fixing Roller 10.5.2.1 Removing the Fixing Upper Roller 0007-2916 When opened, the fixing upper unit becomes unstable. Be sure to use a iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 screwdriver as shown to support it.
Page 508 Chapter 10 8) While paying attention to the thermal switch and the thermistor, remove the upper roller assembly. 9) Remove the C-ring [1] at the front, and remove the gear [2], bushing [3], and bearing [4]. F-10-33 F-10-36 10) Remove the C-ring [1] at the rear, and remove the electrode plate 6) Open the fixing upper unit [1].
Page 509: Mounting The Fixing Upper Roller
Chapter 10 remove the upper roller assembly. c. When mounting, clean the electrode plate [1] and the electrode 9) Remove the C-ring [1] at the front, and remove the gear [2], bushing terminal [2]. [3], and bearing [4]. 10.5.2.4 Mounting the Fixing Upper Roller 0008-8203 / iR85+ / iR8070 Mount the upper roller by reversing the steps used to remove it.
Page 510: Adjusting The Lower Roller Pressure (Nip Width)
Chapter 10 a. Generating Output for Measuring the Nip Width Before measuring the nip width, wait for 15 min after the end of the machine's warm-up period and make 20 A4 prints: 1) Place A3 paper in the manual feed tray. 2) Make the following selections in service mode to generate output: COPIER>FUNCTION>FIXING>NIP-CHK.
Page 511 Chapter 10 F-10-53 F-10-50 3) Remove the E-ring [1] at the front, slide the bearing [2] in the direction of the gear. Take care not to lose the parallel pin used in each roller. 10.5.4.2 Removing the External Delivery Roller 0008-8205 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Remove the fixing assembly.
Page 512: Internal Delivery Roller
Chapter 10 F-10-59 10.5.5.2 Removing the Internal Delivery Roller F-10-56 5) Remove the E-ring [1], one-way gear [2], and bearing [3] at the rear 0008-8206 of the external roller shaft; then, remove the 2 Erings [4] and the 2 / iR85+ / iR8070 rollers [5] of each roller.
Page 513: Mounting The Main Thermistor
Chapter 10 thermistor [2]. F-10-65 10.5.6.3 Mounting the Main Thermistor 0007-2914 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 F-10-62 When mounting the main thermistor to the fixing assembly, be sure that the tie-wrap [1] is as shown. The tie-wrap serves as a stopper by butting against the claw [2]. Check also to be sure that the main thermistor and the fixing roller are When shifting the thermistor assembly to the rear, take care not to not away from each other.
Page 514: Thermal Switch
Chapter 10 F-10-68 F-10-71 10.5.8 Thermal Switch 5) Remove the screw [1], and detach the sub thermistor [2]. 10.5.8.1 Removing the Thermal Switch Unit 0007-2880 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Remove the fixing assembly. 2) Remove the fixing web; then, remove the 2 screws [1] and the oil pan [2], and detach the fixing harness cover [3].
Page 515: Removing The Thermal Switch Unit
Chapter 10 F-10-74 F-10-77 10.5.8.2 Removing the Thermal Switch Unit 10.5.8.3 Mounting the Thermal Switch Unit 0008-8195 0007-2912 / iR85+ / iR8070 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Remove the fixing assembly. 2) Remove the fixing web; then, remove the 2 screws [1] and the oil pan [2], and detach the fixing harness cover [3].
Page 516: Removing The Main/Sub Heater
Chapter 10 - The thermal switch must be replaced as the thermal switch unit. - Do not use again the thermal switch wolse contact point become open. 10.5.9 Fixing Heater 10.5.9.1 Removing the Main/Sub Heater 0007-2878 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Remove the fixing assembly. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fixing connector unit [2];...
Page 517: Points To Note When Mounting The Fixing Heater
Chapter 10 Do not loosen the fixing screw on the inlet guide, as you will have to adjust the position of the inlet guide if you remove the inlet guide base. If you must loosen it, be sure to adjust the position of the inlet guide afterward by referring to the index on the fixing assembly.
Page 518: Mounting The Fixing Cleaning Belt
Chapter 10 When cleaning the silicone oil pan, be sure to remove the silicone oil collecting in the oil pan [7] found under the cleaning belt feeding roller. F-10-90 4) Remove the two screws [3] used to secure the fixing cleaning belt assembly, and open the top of the fixing cleaning belt assembly upward.
Page 519: Claw Jam Sensor
Chapter 10 2) Remove the fixing motor. 3) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the fixing front support base [2]. Take up roller Cleaning belt F-10-98 feeding roller 10.5.12 External Delivery Sensor F-10-95 10.5.12.1 Remove the External Delivery Sensor 0007-2928 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 2) After mounting the fixing cleaning belt, move the plunger [4] of the...
Page 520: Internal Delivery Sensor
Chapter 10 F-10-104 10.5.13.2 Removing the Internal Delivery Sensor F-10-101 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the external delivery sensor 0008-8211 [2]. / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Remove the fixing assembly. 2) Open the upper delivery assembly, and remove the 2 screws [1]; then, detach the internal delivery sensor assembly [2].
Page 521: Fixing/Feeding Outlet Sensor
Chapter 10 F-10-110 10.5.15.2 Remove the Fixing/Feeder Unit Outlet Sensor 0008-8213 F-10-107 / iR85+ / iR8070 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and detach the reversal sensor [2]. 1) Slide out the fixing/feed unit. 2) Remove the screw [1] from the bottom face of the fixing/feeder unit; then, detach the fixing/feed outlet sensor [2].
Page 522: Removing The Delivery Speed Switching Clutch
Chapter 10 F-10-115 F-10-113 4) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, 4) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the delivery speed switching clutch [3]. detach the delivery speed switching clutch [3]. F-10-116 F-10-114 When detaching the delivery speed switching clutch, take care not to...
Page 523: Lower Separation Claw
Chapter 10 F-10-117 10.5.18 Lower Separation Claw 10.5.18.1 Removing the Lower Separation Claw 0007-1535 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Remove the fixing assembly from the main body. 2) Remove the two screws, and detach the lower separation claw assembly together with the support plate.
Page 525: Chapter 11 External And Controls
Chapter 11 External and Controls...
Page 527 Contents Contents 11.1 Control Panel................................11-1 11.1.1 Outline...................................... 11-1 11.1.2 Outline...................................... 11-1 11.2 Counters ..................................11-3 11.2.1 Soft Counters ................................... 11-3 11.2.2 Soft Counters ................................... 11-4 11.3 Fans ....................................11-6 11.3.1 Changes Made to Externals/Auxiliary Controls(iR105)......................11-6 11.3.2 Fans ......................................11-7 11.3.3 Fans ......................................11-9 11.3.4 Fans ......................................
Page 528 Contents 11.5.9 Drum Drive Assembly ................................11-25 11.5.9.1 Removing the Drum Drive Assembly ..............................11-25 11.5.9.2 Removing the Drive Assembly................................. 11-26 11.5.10 Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly ............................11-27 11.5.10.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly ............................ 11-27 11.5.10.2 Removing the Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly ............................ 11-27 11.5.11 Toner Cartridge Drive Assembly............................
Page 529 Contents 11.5.27.3 When Replacing the HV-DC PCB ................................11-42 11.5.27.4 When Replacing the HV-DC PCB ................................11-42 11.5.28 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan ..............................11-42 11.5.28.1 Removing the Fixing Heat Discharge Fan (FM2)...........................11-42 11.5.29 Scanner Cooling Fan................................11-42 11.5.29.1 Removing the Scanner Motor Cooling Fan (FM18) ..........................11-42 11.5.30 Stream Reading Fan ................................
Page 531: Control Panel
Chapter 11 11.1 Control Panel 11.1.1 Outline 0007-0710 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 The copier's control panel consists of the PCBs shown in Figure and a liquid crystal display (LCD) panel. Control panel Control Color LCD and Control panel panel key PCB Touch Panel inverter PCB Control panel CPU PCB...
Page 532 Chapter 11 Control panel Two inverter Color LCD and Key B PCB Touch Panel Control panel CPU PCB Key A PCB Key C PCB Main controller PCB Bi-centronics PCB F-11-2 T-11-2 Related Service Mode COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>LCD-CHK Checks the LCD for missing dots. COPIER>FUNCTION>PANEL>LED-CHK Starts a check on the control panel LEDs (activation).
Page 533: Counters
Chapter 11 11.2 Counters 11.2.1 Soft Counters 0006-9806 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 The machine is equipped with soft counters to keep count of prints it makes. The counter readings are checked by pressing the Check key in the control panel.
Page 534: Printing Operation
Chapter 11 -230V (Europe) T-11-7 Counter Description *1 Default Default change *2 Counter 1 Total (A through L) Fixed Counter 2 Total large (ACEGIK) May be changed Counter 3 Total small May be changed Counter 4 Scan small May be changed Counter 5 May be changed Counter 6...
Page 535 Chapter 11 -230V (Europe) T-11-11 Counter Description *1 Default Default change *2 Counter 1 Total (A through L) Fixed Counter 2 Total large (ACEGIK) May be changed Counter 3 Total small May be changed Counter 4 Scan small May be changed Counter 5 May be changed Counter 6...
Page 536: Fans
Chapter 11 11.3 Fans 11.3.1 Changes Made to Externals/Auxiliary Controls(iR105) 0006-9899 iR105 T-11-12 Unit/location Changes from Purpose of change Rema Reference GP605 (iR600) Added a developing To cool the developing unit. 8.2 Fans fan. Added a system fan. To cool the inside of the system 8.2 Fans box.
Page 537: Fans
Chapter 11 Externals Changed the design To improve the serviceability of of the system cover the main (it remains in the controller PCB-related work. body). Added an angular To cool the inverter. opening for duct suction in the rear upper cover. Added a gasket to To suppress noise.
Page 538 Chapter 11 [11] [13] [12] [14] [15] [10] F-11-3 T-11-13 Ref. Notati Name Description E code Alarm code Primary charging Prevents soiling of the wire in the E824 assembly fan primary charging assembly Fixing heat discharge fan To discharge heat from around E805 Scanner cooling fan To cool the laser scanner unit...
Page 539: Fans
Chapter 11 11.3.3 Fans 0008-8982 Figure shows the arrangement of the machine's fans and the directions of current. Table shows the names and the functions of the fans: [18] [13] [10] [15] [14] [16] [11] [17] [12] F-11-4 T-11-14 Ref. Notati Name Description...
Page 540: Fans
Chapter 11 Ref. Notati Name Description E code Alarm code [16] FM16 System fan To cool the PCBs inside the system E804-0004 000804-0004 [17] FM17 Delivery adhesion To cool paper being delivered 330007 proofing fan [18] FM20 Scanner motor cooling To cool the scanner motor 330005 11.3.4 Fans...
Page 541: Fans
Chapter 11 Ref. Notation Name Function Error code Alarm code FM10 pre-transfer charging discharges ozone from E823 assembly fan around pre-transfer charging assembly [10] FM11 power supply cooling cools DC power supply E804 fan 1 [11] FM12 power supply cooling cools DC power supply E804 fan 2...
Page 542: Sequence Of Fan Operation
Chapter 11 T-11-16 Ref. Notati Name Description E code Alarm code Primary charging Prevents soiling of the wire in the E824 assembly fan primary charging assembly Fixing heat discharge fan To discharge heat from around E805 Scanner cooling fan To cool the laser scanner unit E121-0001 Laser driver cooling fan To cool the laser driver PCB...
Page 543 Chapter 11 - Fans Operating in Keeping with the State of the Scanning Lamp Main power switch ON Stcanning lamp Lamp ON Lamp OFF Standby Pre-heat Scanner ONScanner OFF Optical cooling fan (FM3) Stream reading fan (FM4) Inverter cooling fan (FM9) Power supply cooling fan 1/2 (FM11, FM12)
Page 544: Sequence Of Fan Operation
Chapter 11 11.3.8 Sequence of Fan Operation 0008-9058 iR85+ The machine's fans may operates with the state of the printer unit as shown in figure. When a fan error occurs or the door is opened, the state which the fan was in prior to the error will be used. Main power switch ON After C, Initial...
Page 545: Power Supply System
Chapter 11 11.4 Power Supply System 11.4.1 Power Supply 11.4.1.1 Outline of the Power Supply 0007-0790 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 The machine's DC power is supplied by the DC power supply PCB and the relay PCB. T-11-17 Function DC power supply - Generates DC power from AC power.
Page 546: Backup Battery
Chapter 11 Detection by Machine operation Resetting Overcurrent detection Stops output [2] from the Remove the cause, and turn off and then on the circuit B DC power supply PCB. control panel power switch. 11.4.3 Backup Battery 11.4.3.1 Backup Battery 0007-0811 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 The Main controller PCB, the DC controller PCB and the Reader controller PCB are equipped with a lithium battery (1 pc.
Page 547: Outline
Chapter 11 consumption in this mode is low. The machine will shift to either of the two depending on the setting or presence/absence of job. Shifting condition (Standby/Power-saving/Low-power -> Sleep) - When a specific period of time (which can be changed by operating "Auto Sleep Time" in User mode, 60 min. by default) has passed after the state of standby mode continued for a certain period of time.
Page 548: Outline
Chapter 11 (Purpose: To lower the temperature in the machine) Returning condition to standby mode (Sleep -> Standby) - When the power switch of the control panel is turned on. 5. Power-Off mode The power-off mode is the state that the main power of the machine is switched off. To return from the power-off mode, it is the only way that the main power is switched on.
Page 549: Standby Mode (Normal Operation)
Chapter 11 T-11-20 Mode +3.3 V all night +3.3 V non-all +24V night Standby Power save Low power Sleep Power off 11.4.4.6 Standby Mode (normal operation) 0006-9835 iR105 In standby mode, the machine is in normal operation or is ready to start normal operation at any moment; in other words, most of power supplied are in operation.
Page 550: Power Supply Off Mode
Chapter 11 Shift from Low-Power Mode (low-power -> OFF mode) A shift from low power mode to OFF mode is made on the following condition: - The control panel power switch (soft switch) is off. - Low power mode has lasted for a specific period of time, i.e., a specific period of time as selected in user mode. Return to Standby Mode (OFF mode ->...
Page 551: Parts Replacement Procedure
Chapter 11 11.5 Parts Replacement Procedure 11.5.1 Left Pickup Drive Assembly 11.5.1.1 Removing the Left Pickup Drive Assembly 0007-1912 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 Construction F-11-15 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the high-voltage transformer (DC). 3) Remove the flywheel. 4) Remove the drum gear. 5) Remove the waste toner pipe.
Page 552: Vertical Path Drive Assembly
Chapter 11 11.5.4 Vertical Path Drive Assembly 11.5.4.1 Removing the Vertical Path Drive Assembly 0007-1922 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 Construction F-11-17 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the high-voltage transformer (DC). 3) Remove the flywheel. 4) Remove the drum gear. 5) Remove the waste toner pipe.
Page 553: Waste Toner Drive Assembly
Chapter 11 11.5.6 Multifeeder Pickup Drive Assembly 11.5.6.1 Removing the Multifeeder Pickup Drive Assembly 0007-1928 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 Construction F-11-22 11.5.5 Waste Toner Drive Assembly 11.5.5.1 Removing the Waste Toner Drive Assembly 0007-1925 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 F-11-25 Construction 1) Remove the rear cover.
Page 554: Removing The Lifter Drive Assembly (Left Deck)
Chapter 11 F-11-27 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the high-voltage transformer (DC). 3) Remove the flywheel. 4) Remove the drum gear. 5) Remove the waste toner pipe. 6) Remove the screw, and loosen the harness guide [1]; disconnect the F-11-30 two connectors [2], and remove the four screws [3];...
Page 555: Drum Drive Assembly
Chapter 11 When mounting the main drive assembly, be sure to slide out the fixing/ feeding assembly in advance. (A coupling and a spring are mounted to the back of the main drive assembly. If the fixing/feeding assembly is inside, the action of the spring will hinder mounting work.) 11.5.9 Drum Drive Assembly 11.5.9.1 Removing the Drum Drive Assembly 0007-3070...
Page 556: Removing The Drive Assembly
Chapter 11 F-11-37 F-11-40 7) Disconnect the 4 connectors [1], and remove the 5 screws [2]; then, detach the drum drive assembly [3]. When removing the screw from the drum shaft gear, be sure to pay attention to the direction of gear rotation, i.e., turn it counterclockwise. 4) Remove the water toner case;...
Page 557: Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly
Chapter 11 11.5.10 Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly 11.5.10.1 Removing the Cassette Pickup Drive Assembly 0007-3073 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Remove the waste toner case base. 2) Remove the cassette pickup assembly (upper, lower). 3) Remove the 5 screws [1], and detach the cassette pickup drive assembly [2].
Page 558: Power Supply Unit
Chapter 11 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the cover plate [2]; them, remove the 2 screws [3], and detach the power supply unit [4]. F-11-47 F-11-50 4) Remove the three screws [4], and disconnect the connector [5]; then, 11.5.12.2 Removing the Power Supply Unit detach the toner cartrdige drive motor [6].
Page 559: Control Panel
Chapter 11 11.5.13 Control Panel 11.5.13.1 Removing the Control Panel Unit 0007-2993 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Disconnect the connector [1]. F-11-56 6) While paying attention to the claw [2], detach the upper arm cover [1]. 7) Remove the harness clip [3]. F-11-53 If for a 230V model, detach the ferrite core [2].
Page 560: Removing The Control Panel Unit
Chapter 11 F-11-60 12) Remove the 6 RS tightening screws [1]; then, while paying attention to the claw [3], detach the lower arm [2]. F-11-58 When mounting, be sure to match the marking [7] of the control panel harness against the wire saddle at the rear. 10) Remove the 2 RS tightening screws [1], and detach the original delivery tray [2].
Page 561: Removing The Control Panel Unit
Chapter 11 F-11-63 F-11-66 3) Remove the 5 screws [1]. 7) Remove the 3 screws [1]. 4) Turn over the control panel [2] to the front, and disconnect he 8) Turn over the control panel [2] to the front, and disconnect the connector [3];...
Page 562 Chapter 11 F-11-69 F-11-72 3) Remove 2 screws [1]. 8) Remove the 4 screws [1], and remove the process unit cover [2]. F-11-70 F-11-73 4) Open the front cover. 5) Remove the screw [1], and detach the primary charging assembly 9) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1].
Page 563: Control Panel Support Unit
Chapter 11 F-11-78 F-11-75 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], 2 connector fixing screws [2], and 2 spring 11) Remove the 1 screw [1], and detach the left upper cover (small) [2]. washers [3]; then, detach the connector cover [4]. 4) Remove the 9 screws [5], and detach the control panel support unit [6].
Page 564: Manual Feed Tray Switch Assembly
Chapter 11 F-11-84 3) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, F-11-81 detach the potential sensor PCB [3]. 11.5.15.2 Removing the Front Cover Switch Assembly 0008-8271 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Remove the control panel unit. 2) Remove the 3 screws [1], and detach the cover switch assembly [2].
Page 565: Drum Heater Switch Assembly
Chapter 11 F-11-87 3) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, detach the potential sensor PCB [3]. F-11-90 11.5.17.2 Removing the Drum Heater Switch Assembly 0008-8274 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Remove the left lower cover (4 screws). 3) Remove the 3 screws [1], and disconnect the 7 connectors [2];...
Page 566: Removing The Dc Controller Pcb
Chapter 11 COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP>D-HV-DE COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>D-HV-TR COPIER>ADJUST>HV-TR>D-PRE-TR COPIER>ADJUST>HV-SP>D-HV-SP F-11-94 F-11-92 8) Turn off and then on the main power switch. 11.5.18.4 When Replacing the DC Controller PCB 11.5.18.2 Removing the DC Controller PCB 0008-8603 0007-3085 / iR85+ / iR8070 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) If possible, print out the user mode/service mode data.
Page 567: Control Panel Inverter Pcb
Chapter 11 F-11-98 F-11-96 11.5.20.2 Removing the Control Panel Inverter 11.5.19.2 Removing the Control Panel Controller (CPU) 0008-8934 / iR85+ / iR8070 0008-8932 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Remove the 3 screws, and detach the control panel lower cover [2]. 2) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and free the harness from the harness 1) Remove the 4 mounting screws [1], disconnect the 5 connectors [2], guide [2].
Page 568: Removing The Control Panel Pcb
Chapter 11 11.5.21.2 Removing the Control Panel PCB A sheet [5] is attached to the control panel case; take care not to detach or bend the sheet. 0008-8251 / iR85+ 1) Remove the control panel lower cover. - Removing the Control Panel Case 2) Remove heater 4 screws [1], and detach the control panel case [2].
Page 569: All Night Power Supply Pcb
Chapter 11 F-11-110 3) Disconnect the 5 connectors [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the all-night power supply PCB [3]. F-11-108 11.5.22.2 Removing the AC Driver PCB 0008-8285 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Detach delivery anti-adhesion fan mounting base. 2) Remove the mounting screw [2] of the grounding wire [1].
Page 570: Relay Pcb
Chapter 11 11.5.25 High-Voltage Transformer (AC) 11.5.25.1 Removing the High-Voltage Transformer Assembly (AC) 0007-3093 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Remove the rear cover. 2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the HV-AC PCB [3] together with the mounting base. F-11-113 11.5.24 Relay PCB 11.5.24.1 Removing the Relay PCB...
Page 571: Hv-Ac Pcb
Chapter 11 2) Disconnect the 2 connectors [1], and remove the 4 screws [2]; then, detach the HV-AC PCB [3]. F-11-118 [1] [3] 3) Disconnect the 3 connectors [1], and remove the screw [2]; then, F-11-121 detach the high-voltage transformer assembly (AC) [3]. 11.5.27 HV-DC PCB 11.5.27.1 Removing the HV-DC PCB 0007-3094...
Page 572: When Replacing The Hv-Dc Pcb
Chapter 11 > > > COPIER ADJUST DEVELOP HVT-DE > > > COPIER ADJUST HV-SP HVT-SP > > > COPIER ADJUST HV-TR HVT-TR > > > COPIER ADJUST HV-TR H-PRE-TR F-11-123 11.5.27.3 When Replacing the HV-DC PCB F-11-125 0008-4626 5) Turn off and then on the main power switch. iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 11.5.28 Fixing Heat Discharge Fan 1) Replace the HV-DC PCB.
Page 573: Stream Reading Fan
Chapter 11 When mounting the fan, be sure that the direction of air current is as indicated by the arrow. 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the stream read fan unit [3]. F-11-127 4) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2];...
Page 574: Removing The Laser Cooling Fan 1 (Fm3)
Chapter 11 indicated by the arrow. 1) Remove the reader controller PCB or slide the reader unit. 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the connector; then, detach the laser driver cooling fan [3] together with the mounting base. 11.5.31.4 Removing the Laser Cooling Fan 2 (FM5) 0007-3044 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070...
Page 575: Drum Fan
Chapter 11 F-11-138 F-11-141 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2]; then, 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect the 2 connectors [2]; then, detach the delivery speed switching clutch [3]. detach the delivery speed switching clutch [3]. F-11-139 F-11-142 When removing the delivery speed switching clutch, take care not to...
Page 576: Inverter Cooling Fan
Chapter 11 2) Remove the 2 screws [1], and disconnect that connector [2]; then, detach the drum fan unit [3]. F-11-147 F-11-144 3) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 3 screws [2]; then, detach the drum fan [3]. When mounting the fan, be sure that the direction of air current is as indicated by the arrow.
Page 577: Power Supply Cooling Fan 1
Chapter 11 F-11-150 F-11-152 When mounting the fan, be sure that the direction of air current is as indicated by the arrow. When mounting the fan, be sure that the direction of air current is as indicated by the arrow. 11.5.36 Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 11.5.36.1 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan 1 11.5.36.2 Removing the Power Supply Cooling Fan 1...
Page 578: Power Supply Cooling Fan 2
Chapter 11 2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the fixing/feeding lower cover (1) [2] and the fixing/feeding lower cover (2) [3]. F-11-154 F-11-156 When mounting the fan, be sure that the direction of air current is as indicated by the arrow. When mounting the fan, be sure that the direction of air current is as indicated by the arrow.
Page 579: Developing Fan
Chapter 11 F-11-158 11.5.38.2 Removing the Separation Fan (FM13) 0008-8265 / iR85+ / iR8070 F-11-161 1) Slide out the fixing/feeder unit. 2) Remove the 4 screws [1], and detach the fixing/feeding lower cover 11.5.39 Developing Fan (1) [2] and the fixing/feeding lower cover (2) [3]. 11.5.39.1 Removing the Developing Fan (FM15) 0007-3064 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070...
Page 580: Delivery Anti-Adhesion Fan
Chapter 11 11.5.39.2 Removing the Developing Fan (FM15) 0008-8266 / iR85+ / iR8070 1) Remove the primary charging assembly. 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 2 screws [2]; then, detach the fan unit [3]. F-11-166 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the fan [2]. F-11-164 3) Remove the 2 screws [1], and detach the developing assembly fan [2].
Page 581: Duplex Feed Fan
Chapter 11 11.5.41 Duplex Feed Fan 11.5.41.1 Removing the Duplex Feed Fan (FM19) 0007-3068 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Remove the duplex unit cover. (4 screws, 3 knobs) 2) Disconnect the connector [1], and remove the 3 screws [2]; then, detect the duplex feed fan unit [3]. At this time, keep in mind that the shift assembly [4] will also come off.
Page 582: Removing The Lcd Panel
Chapter 11 F-11-175 3) Remove the control panel. CPU PCB and the control panel inverter PCB. 4) Free the harness from the wire saddle, and remove the 9 screws [1]; then, detach the control panel plate [2]. F-11-179 4) Remove the control panel. CPU PCB and the control panel inverter PCB.
Page 583: Meap
Chapter 12 MEAP...
Page 585 Contents Contents 12.1 MEAP..................................12-1 12.1.1 Overview....................................12-1 12.1.2 MEAP Counter..................................12-1 12.1.3 Construction of the MEAP Platform............................12-1...
Page 587: Overview
Chapter 12 12.1 MEAP 12.1.1 Overview 0008-1396 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 The term MEAP stands for Multifunctional Embedded Application Platform, and is used to generically refer to a platform for software built into MFPs and peripheral equipment. The architecture is based on Java (J2ME, i.e., Java 2 Platform Micro Edition), and is designed to enable the execution of Java applications.
Page 588 Chapter 12 conjunction with the system software. The following shows the components of a MEAP application: [7] [8] F-12-1 [1] User Interface Control Bock installed as part of the system software [2] Device Control Block installed as part of the system software [3] Operating System installed as part of the system software [4] Java VM...
Page 589: Chapter 13 Maintenance And Inspection
Chapter 13 Maintenance and Inspection...
Page 591 Contents Contents 13.1 Periodically Replaced Parts ............................13-1 13.1.1 Overview....................................13-1 13.1.2 Overview....................................13-1 13.1.3 Main Body ....................................13-1 13.1.4 Main body ....................................13-2 13.1.5 Main body ....................................13-3 13.2 Durables and Consumables ............................13-6 13.2.1 Overview....................................13-6 13.2.2 Overview....................................13-6 13.2.3 Main Body ....................................13-6 13.2.4 Main body ....................................
Page 593: Periodically Replaced Parts
Chapter 13 13.1 Periodically Replaced Parts 13.1.1 Overview 0006-9524 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 Some parts of the machine must be replaced on a periodical basis to ensure a specific level of product performance; once they fail, the consequences will be appreciable. If possible, plan the replacement to coincide with a scheduled visit.
Page 594: Main Body
Chapter 13 The above figures are estimates only, and are subject to change based on future data. 13.1.4 Main body 0008-8438 / iR85+ T-13-2 As of October 2004 Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life (approx.; Remarks copies) Pre-transfer/Transfer/Separation FB4-3687-000 250,000* charging wire Primary charging wire 500,000* Primary charging grid wire...
Page 595: Main Body
Chapter 13 [10] [6] Primary charging wire cleaner 1 [11] [7] Primary charging wire cleaner 2 [8] Transfer charging wire cleaner 1 [9] Transfer charging wire cleaner 2 [10] Separation charging wire cleaner [11] Pre-transfer charging wire cleaner F-13-3 [13] Ozone filter for FM8 [16] Dust-proofing filter for FM4 [12] Ozone filter for FM2 [17] Dust-proofing filter for FM10...
Page 596 Chapter 13 As of October 2004 Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life Remarks (approx.; copies) Thermistor FH7-7464-000 500,000 Thermal switch unit FG6-7745-000 1,000,000 Primary charging wire cleaner FF5-6883-000 500,000 Primary charging wire cleaner FF5-6884-000 500,000 Transfer charging wire FF5-6883-000 500,000 cleaner 1 Transfer charging wire FF5-6884-000...
Page 597 Chapter 13 [10] [6] Primary charging wire cleaner 1 [11] [7] Primary charging wire cleaner 2 [8] Transfer charging wire cleaner 1 [9] Transfer charging wire cleaner 2 [10] Separation charging wire cleaner [11] Pre-transfer charging wire cleaner F-13-6 [13] Ozone filter for FM8 [12] Ozone filter for FM2 [16] Dust-proofing filter for FM10 [14] Dust-proofing filter for FM1...
Page 598: Durables And Consumables
Chapter 13 13.2 Durables and Consumables 13.2.1 Overview 0006-9574 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 Some parts of the machine may prove to require replacement once or more over the period of product warranty because of wear or damage. Replace them when they fail; see the following for a guide: 13.2.2 Overview 0008-8446 / iR85+ / iR8070...
Page 599 Chapter 13 As of Oct 2004 Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life (pages) Remarks Insulating bush (front/rear) FB5-6934- 500,000 Replace together with fixing upper roller. Fixing roller bearing XG9-0421- 1,000,000 Fixing pressure roller bearing XG9-0447- 1,000,000 Delivery upper separation claw FB5-3625- 500,000 Delivery lower separation claw...
Page 600: Main Body
Chapter 13 [26] [28] [29] [27] [25] [25] [26] [26] [24] [25] [26] [24] [25] [24] [26] [24] F-13-8 [12] [11] [10] [13] [10] [14] [15] [18] [16] [20] [19] [22] [20] [19] [17] [22] [23] [21] F-13-9 13.2.4 Main body 0008-8447 13-8...
Page 601 Chapter 13 T-13-5 As of October 2004 No. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life Remarks (pages) Scanning lamp FH7-3347- 200 hr or Check in service mode. 150,000 - Length of Activation activations COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL- 1>SCN-LMP - Number of Activations COPIER>DISPLAY>MISC>SC AN-LMP Developing FG9-3885- 1,000,000...
Page 602 Chapter 13 As of October 2004 No. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life Remarks (pages) Feeding roller FB2-2034- 250,000 Actual Number of Pages Made (deck, cassette) (2 pc. for each) The actual number of pagesm made may be checked in service mode.* Left deck: LD-FD-RL Right deck: RD-FD-RL...
Page 603: Main Body
Chapter 13 [12] [10] [14] [13] [16] [14] [13] [11] [16] [17] [15] F-13-11 13.2.5 Main body 0008-8457 / iR8070 T-13-6 As of October 2004 No. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life (pages) Remarks Scanning lamp FG6-4864- 3,000,000 Check in service mode. scanning - Length of Activation (208 V)
Page 604 Chapter 13 As of October 2004 No. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life (pages) Remarks Fixing web FY1-1157- 500,000 Replace simultaneously with the upper fixing roller. Insulating bush FB5-6934- 500,000 (front/rear) Fixing roller XG9-0421- 1,000,000 bearing Fixing pressure XG9-0447- 1,000,000 roller bearing Delivery upper FB5-8727-...
Page 605: Main Body
Chapter 13 As of October 2004 No. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life (pages) Remarks Separation roller FB2-7545- 120,000 Actual Number of Pages (manual feed Made tray) The actual number of pages made may be checked in service mode.* M-SP-RL *COPIER>COUNTER>DRBL-1.
Page 606 Chapter 13 T-13-7 As of October 2004 No. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life Remarks (pages) Developing FG9-3885- 1,000,000 cylinder Developing FS5-6579- 1,000,000 assembly roll Cleaner FB4-8018- 250,000 separation claw Cleaning blade FB6-2720- 1,000,000 Use both edges; 50,000 pages each. Apply toner upon replacement.
Page 607 Chapter 13 As of October 2004 No. Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life Remarks (pages) Separation roller FB2-7777- 250,000 Actual Number of Pages Made (deck, cassette) (1 pc. for each) The actual number of pages made may be checked in service mode.* Left deck: LD-SP-RL Right deck: RD-SP-RL...
Page 608: Side Paper Deck
Chapter 13 [12] [10] [14] [13] [16] [14] [13] [11] [16] [17] [15] F-13-15 13.2.7 Side Paper Deck 0006-9715 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 T-13-8 As of Oct 2004 Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life Remarks (pages) Side Paper Deck Feed FF5-7829- 500,000 Actual number Roller...
Page 609: Side Paper Deck
Chapter 13 F-13-16 13.2.8 Side Paper Deck 0008-8459 / iR85+ / iR8070 T-13-9 As of October 2004 Parts name Parts No. Q'ty Life (pages) Remarks Side paper deck FF5-7829- 250,000 The actual number of pickup roller pages (front) made may be checked in FF5-7830- service mode.*...
Page 610 Chapter 13 F-13-17 13-18...
Page 611: Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure
Chapter 13 13.3 Scheduled Servicing Basic Procedure 13.3.1 Scheduled Service Chart 0006-9728 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1. As a rule, provide scheduled service every 500,000 copies. 2. Check the Service Book before setting out for a visit, and take parts expected to require replacement. 3.
Page 612 Chapter 13 T-13-11 Work Checks Remarks Clean the optical assembly: Clean with a blower brush; if - No. 1/2/3 mirror dirt cannot be removed, use - Dust-proof glass alcohol. - Reflecting plate - Standard white plate Check the scanner system: Check the tension of the cable.
Page 613 Chapter 13 1. As a rule, perform scheduled servicing work every 250,000 pages. 2. Before setting out for a scheduled visit, check with the Service Book, and take parts that are likely to need replacement. 3. Whenever you have cleaned a charging wire, make sure it is completely dry before mounting it back to the machine. 4.
Page 614 Chapter 13 F-13-21 T-13-14 Wrong T-13-15 Step Checks Remarks Clean the optical path: Use a blower brush; if the - No. 1/2/3 mirror dirt is appreciable, use - Dust-proofing glass alcohol. - Contact glass for stream reading - Scanner reflecting plate - Standard white plate Clean the scanner: Check the wire for tension.
Page 615: Scheduled Service Chart
Chapter 13 Clean the copyboard glass. Make test copies. Make sample copies. Press the leakage breaker test Press the test switch while switch to make sure that the the power switch is ON and breaker operates normally. the lever [1] of the leakage Thereafter, breaker is at ON;...
Page 616 Chapter 13 Clean the charging Standard (single-sided) assemblies: Leading edge: 4.0 - Charging wire (primary, +1.5/-1.0 mm pre-transfer, transfer/ Left/right: 2.5 ±1.5 mm separation) Trailing edge: 2.5 ±1.5 - Grid wire (primary charging assembly) - Shielding plate (each charging assembly) - Roller electrode Points to Note When Cleaning/Replacing the Charging Wire or Replacing the Charging Wire Cleaner At the end of the following, always check to make sure that the charging wire is in the middle of the charging wire cleaner;...
Page 617: Scheduled Service Chart
Chapter 13 Clean the waste toner collection If more than 50% of the case. waste toner is full, dispose of the waste toner in a plastic bag; or, replace the waste toner collection case. Clean the filters: Remove the dust collecting - Ozone filter on the filter surface.
Page 618 Chapter 13 1. As a rule, perform scheduled servicing work every 250,000 pages. 2. Before setting out for a scheduled visit, check with the Service Book, and take parts that are likely to need replacement. 3. Whenever you have cleaned a charging wire, make sure it is completely dry before mounting it back to the machine. 4.
Page 619 Chapter 13 F-13-25 T-13-22 Wrong T-13-23 Step Checks Remarks Clean the waste toner collection If more than 50% of the case. waste toner is full, dispose of the waste toner in a plastic bag; or, replace the waste toner collection case. Clean the filters: Remove the dust collecting - Ozone filter...
Page 620: Scheduled Service Items
Chapter 13 Press the leakage breaker test Press the test switch while switch to make sure that the the power switch is ON and breaker operates normally. the lever [1] of the leakage Thereafter, breaker is at ON; if normal, turn off the power switch, the lever should shift to OFF and shift the lever to ON position;...
Page 621 Chapter 13 Service interval Unit Location installation every every Remarks 500,000 1,000,000 If normal temperature/ low humidity, every 400,000 pages. Grid wire (Primary) Clean Replace Shielding plate Clean Clean If high temperature/ humidity, every 250,000,pages. Electrode Clean Clean If high temperature/ humidity, every 250,000,pages.
Page 622: Scheduled Service Items
Chapter 13 Ozone filter for FM8 Ozone filter for FM20 Ozone filter for FM2 Dust-proof filter for upper front cover Dust-proof filter for FM1 Dust-proof filter for FM10 Dust-proof filter for front cover Dust-proof filter for FM3 F-13-26 13.3.6 Scheduled Service Items 0008-8469 Do not use solvents other than those indicated herein.
Page 623 Chapter 13 Unit Location Interval Remarks upon every every every installatio 250,000 500,000 750,000 Standard white Clean Clean plate Charging Charging wire Clean Replace assembly (primary) Charging wire Clean Replace (pre-transfer, transfer/ separation) Grid wire Clean Clean Replace (primary) Charging Clean Clean assembly...
Page 624: Scheduled Service Items
Chapter 13 Ozone filter (FM8) Dust-proofing filter (FM4) Ozone filter (FM2) Dust-proofing filter (FM10) Dust-proofing filter (FM1) Dust-proofing filter (FM14) Dust-proofing filter (FM3) F-13-27 13.3.7 Scheduled Service Items 0008-9545 / iR8070 Do not use solvents other than those indicated herein. T-13-26 Unit Location...
Page 625 Chapter 13 Unit Location Interval Remarks upon every every every installation 250,000 500,000 750,000 Charging Charging wire Clean Replace assembly (primary) Charging wire Clean Replace (pre-transfer, transfer/ separation) Grid wire Clean Clean Replace (primary) Charging Clean Clean assembly shielding plate Electrode Clean Clean...
Page 626: Scheduled Service Items
Chapter 13 Ozone filter (FM8) Ozone filter (FM2) Dust-proofing filter (FM10) Dust-proofing filter (FM1) Dust-proofing filter (FM14) Dust-proofing filter (FM3) F-13-28 13.3.8 Scheduled Service Items 0008-9078 iR85+ Do not use solvents other than those indicated herein. T-13-27 Unit Location Interval Remarks upon every...
Page 627 Chapter 13 Unit Location Interval Remarks upon every every every installatio 250,000 500,000 750,000 Electrode (stop Clean Clean the following with ring for drum Lubr icat alcohol; then, apply heater) FY9-6008 on the charge collecting brush: - Electrode of slip ring - Wall surface of protrusion on electrode - Charge collecting brush...
Page 628: Scheduled Service Work
Chapter 13 Ozone filter (FM8) Dust-proofing filter (FM4) Ozone filter (FM2) Dust-proofing filter (FM10) Dust-proofing filter (FM1) Dust-proofing filter (FM14) Dust-proofing filter (FM3) F-13-29 13.3.9 Scheduled Service Work 0007-0209 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 Perform the following when maintaining the area around the drum as part of scheduled service work: Work 1 a.
Page 629 Chapter 13 F-13-31 6) With the cleaner assembly [1] halfway slid put, remove the screw [2] (1 each), and detach the two toner receptacle fixing plates [3]. 7) Remove the front toner receptacle, and remove the toner from the front toner receptacle [4]. F-13-32 8) Slide out the cleaner assembly [1], and remove the screw [2] (1 each);...
Page 630 Chapter 13 F-13-33 Work 2 a. Cleaning the photosensitive drum b. Removing the toner from the magnet roller assembly c. Turning over or replacing the cleaner blade During the work, take care not to turn the magnet roller drive assembly. Otherwise, waste toner can drop from the cleaner assembly. 1) Slide out the process unit.
Page 631 Chapter 13 F-13-35 - Clean the drum in widths of 5 to 10 cm in peripheral direction. - For a single width, you may force the lint-free paper back and forth 15 to 20 times without damaging the drum. 5) Wait until the alcohol has evaporated; then, dry wipe the drum with lint-free paper. If traces remain, repeat step 4) and increase the number of trips made. 6) Rorate the drum so that that new areas may be cleaned (5 to 10 cm).
Page 632 Chapter 13 End butted. F-13-37 When butting the blade, be sure to force it so that there is no gap. 12) Secure the blade retaining plate with screws as indicated. - For now, temporarily tighten screws 1 through 5. F-13-38 With the blade pressed down by the plate, temporarily tighten the screws.
Page 633: Scheduled Maintenance Work Procedure
Chapter 13 After mounting the cleaning blade, rotate the drum; if the toner is not colleted by the cleaning blade, repeat the foregoing steps. If it is not corrected after tightening the screws once again, replace the cleaning blade. 13.3.10 Scheduled Maintenance Work Procedure 0008-8636 / iR8070 Perform the steps shown for scheduled maintenance work around the drum:...
Page 634 Chapter 13 F-13-41 6) Remove the two screws [1] of the cleaner assembly [2] one by one, and detach the toner pan (front, rear); then, remove the toner from the toner pan [3]. F-13-42 Work Procedure 2 a. Cleaning the Photosensitive Drum b.
Page 635 Chapter 13 CK-0429 F-13-43 4) While forcing the lint-free paper against the photosensitive drum, move it from the front to the rear and then from the rear to the front to wipe the drum. 5 10cm F-13-44 - Keep the width of the cleaning movement to 5 to 10 cm. - For a single area, the lint-free paper may be moved back and forth 15 to 20 times;...
Page 636 Chapter 13 F-13-45 10) Remove the cleaning blade from the cleaning blade assembly. 11) Butt the turned or replaced cleaning blade [7] against the rear of the blade retaining plate [8] while keeping the edge flush. Flush. F-13-46 When butting the blade, be sure to use your fingers to keep it firmly in contact. 12) Tighten the screws on the blade retaining plate in the sequence indicated.
Page 637: Scheduled Maintenance Work Procedure
Chapter 13 - From 6 to 10, tighten fully. 13) Apply toner in the area of the cleaning blade that will come into contact with the photosensitive drum; then, mount the blade. Blade auxiliary Blade back plate Blade support plate Blade back plate F-13-48 When mounting the cleaning blade, be sure to put the blade auxiliary plate between the blade support plate and the blade back plate.
Page 638 Chapter 13 F-13-49 5) Release the lock of the slide rail, and slide out the fixing/feeding unit farther toward the front. F-13-50 6) Remove the two screws [1] of the cleaner assembly [2] one by one, and detach the toner pan (front, rear); then, remove the toner from the toner pan [3]. F-13-51 13-46...
Page 639 Chapter 13 Work Procedure 2 a. Cleaning the Photosensitive Drum b. Remove the Toner from the Magnet Roller Assembly c. Turning Over/Replacing the Cleaning Blade During the work, take care not to rotate the magnet roller drive assembly; otherwise, waste toner may fall out of the center assembly. 1) Slide out the process unit.
Page 640 Chapter 13 6) Rotate the drum for the width of the cleaning movement to 5 to 10 cm, and repeat steps 3) through 5) until you have cleaned the entire surface of the drum. 7) Remove the cleaning blade assembly. 8) Insert a ruler [6] between the magnet roller [4] and the scraper [5], and move it back and forth from the front to the rear and then from the rear to the front to pulverize lumps of waste toner.
Page 641: Points To Note For Scheduled Servicing Work
Chapter 13 F-13-56 While keeping the blade down with the plate, tighten the screws temporarily. - From 6 to 10, tighten fully. 13) Apply toner in the area of the cleaning blade that will come into contact with the photosensitive drum; then, mount the blade. Blade auxiliary Blade back plate Blade support plate...
Page 642 Chapter 13 [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [10] [11] [12] [21] [22] F-13-58 T-13-28 Part Tool/agent Work/remarks Pre-exposure lamp Alcohol Cleaning Copyboard glass Alcohol Cleaning Scanning lamp Lint-free paper Dry wiping Standard white plate Lint-free paper Dry wiping Reflecting plate Blower brush Cleaning...
Page 643: Point To Note On Scheduled Servicing
Chapter 13 Part Tool/agent Work/remarks [16] Dust-collecting roller Disposing of toner trapped dust- collecting roller [17] Transfer guide (upper, lower) Alcohol and lint-free paper Dry wiping; then, cleaning with lint-free paper moistened with alcohol [18] Pre-transfer exposure lamp Alcohol and lint-free paper Dry wiping;...
Page 644 Chapter 13 [13] [14] [15] [16] [17] [18] [19] [20] [10] [11] [12] [21] F-13-59 T-13-29 Item Tool/agent Remarks Pre-exposure lamp Alcohol Cleaning Copyboard glass Alcohol Cleaning Scanning lamp Lint-free paper Dry wiping Standard White plate Lint-free paper Dry wiping Reflecting plate Blower brush Cleaning...
Page 645 Chapter 13 Item Tool/agent Remarks [16] Dust-proofing roller Removing toner collecting around the dust- proofing roller [17] Transfer guide (upper/ Alcohol, Lint-free paper Dry wiping; then, cleaning with lint-free lower) paper moistened with alcohol [18] Pre-transfer charging lamp Alcohol, Lint-free paper Dry wiping;...
Page 646 Chapter 13 [10] [11] [12] [13] [14] [15] [16] F-13-60 T-13-30 Item Tool/agent Remarks Pre-exposure lamp Alcohol Cleaning Separation claw Solvent ad lintfree paper Cleaning Upper roller, Lower roller Cleaning oil, Lint-free paper Cleaning Paper guide Solvent and lintfeed paper Cleaning Feeding assembly Moist cloth*...
Page 647 Chapter 13 Item Tool/agent Remarks [14] Registration roller Alcohol, Lint-free paper Cleaning [15] Manual feed tray, Pickup Alcohol, Lint-free paper Cleaning roller, Feeding roller [16] Vertical path roller Alcohol, Lint-free paper Cleaning *: Be sure no droplet of water remains. T-13-31 ããéÜÉçÅ[Éâ...
Page 649: Chapter 14 Standards And Adjustments
Chapter 14 Standards and Adjustments...
Page 651 Contents Contents 14.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure ...........................14-1 14.1.1 Making Pre-Checks.................................. 14-1 14.1.2 Making Pre-Checks.................................. 14-1 14.1.3 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking the Images) ....................14-2 14.1.4 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking the Density Slope) ..................14-2 14.1.5 Making Checks on the Printer Side (Checking the Solid Black Density) ................
Page 652 Contents 14.6.1 Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip) ..........................14-32 14.6.2 Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip) ..........................14-32 14.7 Electrical Components ............................14-33 14.7.1 Electrical Parts Requiring Work After Replacement......................14-33 14.7.2 Electrical Components Requiring Work After Replacement....................14-33 14.7.3 Electrical Parts Requiring Work After Replacement......................
Page 653 Contents 14.8.29 Position of the Deck (Left) Pickup Solenoid (SL8)......................14-66 14.8.30 Position of the Deck (left) Pickup Solenoid (SL8) ......................14-66 14.8.31 Position of the Cassette 3/4 Pickup Solenoid (SL9/10) ....................... 14-66 14.8.32 Position for the Cassette 3/4 Pickup Solenoid (SL9/10)...................... 14-67 14.8.33 Position of the Side Paper Deck Pickup Roller Releasing Solenoid ...................
Page 655: Image Adjustment Basic Procedure
Chapter 14 14.1 Image Adjustment Basic Procedure 14.1.1 Making Pre-Checks 0007-0542 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 Clean the following: 1. Grid wire 2. Primary charging wire 3. Pre-transfer charging wire 4. Transfer charging wire Check the following: 1. Charging wire for height Make 2 copies each of the NA3 Chart for the following: 1.
Page 656: Making Checks On The Printer Side (Checking The Images)
Chapter 14 Clean the following: 1. Grid wire 2. Primary charging wire 3. Pre-transfer charging wire 4. Transfer charging wire Check the following: 1. Charging wire for height Make several test prints of the following: 1. PG4 (blank) 2. PG6 (halftone) 3.
Page 657: Making Checks On The Printer Side (Checking The Solid Black Density)
Chapter 14 Check the image using PG6. Is there Go to difference in density between front and "Checking the Solid Black Density" rear? Is it lighter at the rear? Turn the adjusting Turn the adjusting screw at the front of screw at the rear of the the primary charging primary charging...
Page 658: Making Checks On The Printer Side (Checking For Fogging)
Chapter 14 Check PG7 (solid black). Is the output Go to free of fuzziness and the "Checking for fogging" density correct? Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VDM. Check the primary charging Is the reading of system and the potential control <VDM>...
Page 659: Making Checks On The Printer Side (Checking Halftone Density)
Chapter 14 Check PG4 (blank) Go to Is the output foggy? "Checking Halftone Density" Make the following in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VDM. Check the potential Is the reading of control system; if <VDM> between 390 normal, replace the and 460? photosensitive drum. Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>VL1M.
Page 660: Making Checks On The Scanner Side (Initial Checks)
Chapter 14 Check PG6 (halftone) Compared with No. 6 and No. 7 (halftone), End. is the density about the same? Set the following in service mode to between 1 and 9: ADJUST>DENS>DENS-ADJ. - A higher value makes images darker. F-14-7 14.1.8 Making Checks on the Scanner Side (Initial Checks) 0008-9663 / iR8070...
Page 661: Making Checks On The Scanner Side (Checking For Fogging)
Chapter 14 Is there Go to a difference in density between front and "Checking the Solid Black" rear? Clean the mirrors. Execute the following in service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ Is there a difference in density between front and rear? Go to “Checking the Density Slope”...
Page 662: Making Checks On The Scanner Side(Checking Halftone Density)
Chapter 14 Make a copy Execute the following in service mode: of the NA3 Chart in text mode. COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ Is the white background foggy? Is the Go to white background “Checking for Fogging” foggy? on the printer side. Increase the white level target value for shading correction in service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>CCD>SH-TRGT (Limit the increase to 40).
Page 663: Making Checks On The Scanner Side(Initial Checks)
Chapter 14 14.1.13 Making Checks on the Scanner Side(Initial Checks) 0007-0548 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 Does the Go to image have a vertical "Checking the Density Slope" line? Clean the following: 1. Mirrors 2. Lens 3. Standard white plate 4. Copyboard glass Execute the following in service mode: 1.
Page 664: Making Checks On The Scanner Side(Checking For Fogging)
Chapter 14 <Checking the Solid Black> Is the image of gray Scale Go to No. 1 (solid black) copied of the “Checking for fogging” NA3 Chart in text mode too light? Check the life of the scanning lamp; if its end is reached, replace it.
Page 665: Making Checks On The Scanner Side(Checking Halftone Density)
Chapter 14 Make a copy Execute the following in service mode: of the NA3 Chart in text mode. 1. COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ Is the white background 2 COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>LUT-ADJ foggy? Is the Go to white background “Checking for Fogging” foggy? on the printer side. Increase the value in the following service mode: COPIER>ADJUST>CCD- SH-TRGT (max.
Page 666: Potential Control System Conversion Table
Chapter 14 14.1.18 Potential Control System Conversion Table 0007-0789 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 T-14-1 Control Primary Developing bias Pre-transfer Transfer Separation [uA] [uA] [uA] [uA] 3.00 1600 3.05 1590 3.10 1580 3.15 1570 3.20 1560 3.25 1550 3.30 1540 3.35...
Page 667 Chapter 14 Control Primary Developing bias Pre-transfer Transfer Separation [uA] [uA] [uA] [uA] 5.70 1060 +102 -219 +270 5.75 1050 +104 -223 +275 5.80 1040 +105 -227 +280 5.85 1030 +107 -231 +285 5.90 1020 +109 -235 +290 5.95 1010 +111 -239 +295...
Page 668 Chapter 14 Control Primary Developing bias Pre-transfer Transfer Separation [uA] [uA] [uA] [uA] 8.70 +214 -463 +570 8.75 +216 -467 +575 8.80 +218 -471 +580 8.85 +220 -475 +585 8.90 +222 -479 +590 8.95 +224 -483 +595 9.00 +225 -487 +600 9.05 +227...
Page 669: Image Adjustments
Chapter 14 14.2 Image Adjustments Making Image Adjustments Be sure to adjust the image position in the following order: 14.2.1 Overview 1. Adjusting the image position for printer output 2. Adjusting the image position for copier output (book move) 0007-0552 3.
Page 670 Chapter 14 Pre- Primary Developing bias Transfer Separation Control [V] transfer [µA] [µA] [µA] [µA] 4.85 1230 -150 +185 4.90 1220 -154 +190 4.95 1210 -158 +195 5.00 1200 -162 +200 5.05 1190 -166 +205 5.10 1180 -170 +210 5.15 1170 -174 +215...
Page 671 Chapter 14 Pre- Primary Developing bias Transfer Separation Control [V] transfer [µA] [µA] [µA] [µA] 7.35 +164 -353 +435 7.40 +165 -357 +440 7.45 +167 -361 +445 7.50 +169 -365 +450 7.55 +171 -369 +455 7.60 +173 -373 +460 7.65 +175 -377 +465...
Page 672: Adjusting The Image Position For Printer Output
Chapter 14 Pre- Primary Developing bias Transfer Separation Control [V] transfer [µA] [µA] [µA] [µA] 9.85 +257 -556 +685 9.90 +259 -560 +690 9.95 +261 -564 +695 10.00 +263 -568 +700 10.05 +265 -572 +705 10.10 +267 -576 +710 10.15 +269 -580 +715...
Page 673 Chapter 14 2.5mm 1.5mm F-14-20 5) Adjusting the Image Front Margin for Each Source of Paper F-14-23 Make the following selections to select '1' (right deck): COPIER> TEST> PG-PICK. - Cassette (3/4) Then, generate the following to check the image front margin: 1) Slide out the cassette, and remove the 2 screws [2] for the cassette COPIER>...
Page 674 Chapter 14 COPIER>TEST>PG65. Likewise, select '2', '3', and '4' by making the following selections: 4+1.5mm,-1.0mm 2.5mm 1.5mm COPIER>TEST>PG-PICK. Then, generate output by making the following selections, adjust image front margin: COPIER>TEST>PG5. Standard: 2.5 ±1.5 mm PG-PICK 1: right deck PG-PICK 2: left deck PG-PICK 3: cassette 3 PG-PICK 4: cassette 4 2.5mm 1.5mm...
Page 675: Adjusting The Image Position Of Copier Output (Book Mode)
Chapter 14 F-14-32 4+1.5mm,-1.0mm 2) Loosen the two fixing screws [3] on the left/right of the cassette, and make adjustments using the adjusting screw [4]. F-14-34 2) Adjusting the Image Front Non-Image Width Place the NA3 Test Chart on the copyboard glass, and make a copy to check the image front non-image width.
Page 676: Adjusting The Image Position For Copier Output (Book Mode)
Chapter 14 Mode: COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X - A higher setting increases the margin. - A lower setting decreases the margin. 2.5mm 1.5mm F-14-37 Adjustment: Adjusting the Fixing Plate of Each Source of Paper - Manual Feed Tray 1) Loosen the 2 mounting screws [1] of the manual feed tray to adjust the manual feed tray position.
Page 677: Adjusting The Image Position Of Copier Output (Adf Mode)
Chapter 14 Adjustment: FEEDER> ADJUST> STRD-S (A4 original) FEEDER> ADJUST> STRD-L (A3 original) - A higher value increases the margin. - A lower value decreases the margin. 2.5mm 1.5mm F-14-43 Adjustment: mounting position of each source of paper. - Manual Feed Tray 1) Loosen the two mounting screws [1] of the manual feed tray, and adjust the position of the manual feed tray.
Page 678 Chapter 14 4+1.5mm,-1.0mm F-14-48 2) Adjusting the Front Non-Image Width Place A3 test chart in the original tray of the ADF and make a copy of it to check the front non-image width. Standards: 2.5 ±1.5 mm Adjustment:mounting position of the ADF original tray. 2.5 1.5mm F-14-49 14-24...
Page 679: Scanning System
Chapter 14 14.3 Scanning System off. Be sure to disconnect the power plug. 14.3.1 When Replacing the CCD Unit 3) Replace the CCD unit. 4) After assembling the machine, connect the power plug to the power 0008-3885 outlet, and turn on the main power switch. iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 5) Execute the following service modes in sequence: 1.
Page 680: When Replacing The Standard White Plate
Chapter 14 following: 3) Replace the standard white plate. Book Mode 4) Assemble the machine, and connect the power plug; then, turn on the A: COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-X main power switch. B: COPIER>ADJUST>ADJ-XY>ADJ-Y 5) Execute the following in service mode in sequence: 1.
Page 681: Points To Note When Replacing The Reader Controller Pcb
Chapter 14 1) Print out the data of user mode/service mode. 2) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory lamp in the control 14.3.9 Points to Note When Replacing the reader panel ore OFF, and turn off the main power switch. 3) Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.
Page 682: Laser Exposure System
Chapter 14 14.4 Laser Exposure System 14.4.1 Points to Note When Replacing the Laser Unit 0008-4300 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory lamp in the control panel is OFF; then, turn off the main power switch. 2) Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet.
Page 683: Checking The Laser Power
Chapter 14 8) Connect the power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the main power switch. 9) Make the following selections in service mode: COPIER> FUNCTION> LASER. 10) Select <POWER-A>, and press the OK key. 11) Check to see that the reading of the digital multimeter is 9 to 11 mV, indicating that the power of the laser A is correct.
Page 684 Chapter 14 F-14-63 7) Connect the probe of the laser power checker to the digital multimeter. F-14-64 8) Connect the power plug to the power outlet, and turn on the main power switch. Make following selections service mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>LASER. 10) Select 'POWER-A', and press the OK key. 11) See that the reading of the digital multimeter is 9 to 11 mV, indicating the power of laser A is correct.
Page 685: Image Formation System
Chapter 14 14.5 Image Formation System 14.5.1 Adjusting the Height of the Charging Wire 0008-8359 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 T-14-3 Height of charging wire Primary - 0mm - 0mm +3mm +3mm Pre-transfer No height adjusting mechanism 13.6 ±0.3mm Separation 17.0 0.2mm 15.5 0.2mm...
Page 686: Fixing System
Chapter 14 14.6 Fixing System 14.6.1 Adjusting the Lower Roller Pressure (nip) T-14-5 0008-9719 / iR85+ / iR8070 Dimension Measure with upper and lower rollers fully heated The nip width must be as indicated in figure; if not, adjust it using the 200 V: 9.0 -/+ 0.5 mm, 208/230 V: pressure adjusting nut.
Page 687: Electrical Components
Chapter 14 14.7 Electrical Components 14.7.4 When Replacing the HDD 0008-2616 14.7.1 Electrical Parts Requiring Work After iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 Replacement 1) Format the HDD. Start up the machine in safe mode (i.e., while holding down the 2 and 8 0007-0672 keys, turn on the main power).
Page 688: Replacing The Main Controller Pcb
Chapter 14 Unless you have registered 'system control group ID' and 'system control ID No.', you will not be able to register cards for the device in the course of Net Spot Accountant setup work. 12) Download the card ID. Keep the machine in a standby state <...
Page 689: When Replacing The Dc Controller Pcb
Chapter 14 outlet, and turn on the main power switch. 5) Enter the following indicated on the service label: 3) Enter the values (4 types) indicated on the label attached to the new COPIER>ADJUST>LASER (all items) HV-DC PCB in service mode. COPIER>ADJUST>DEVELOP (all items) COPIER>ADJUST>DENS (all items) COPIER>ADJUST>BLANK (all items)
Page 690: When Replacing The Hv-Dc Pcb
Chapter 14 When mounting the potential sensor checking electrode to the potential sensor, take care so that the magnet of the checking electrode will not come into contact with the potential sensor cover. 10) Connect the cable [1] of the potential sensor checking electrode to the frame (GND) [2] of the machine.
Page 691: Checking The Surface Potential Control System
Chapter 14 5) Turn off and then on the main power switch. the power switch. Make following selections service mode 14.7.13 Checking the Surface Potential Control (COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOTK), and check to see that the reading of initial rotation is between 0 and 30. System 0008-9088 MEMO: If not, suspect a fault in the DC controller PCB.
Page 692: When Replacing The Potential Sensor/Potential Control Pcb
Chapter 14 14.7.14 When Replacing the Potential Sensor/ Potential Control PCB 0007-0705 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory lamp in the control panel is OFF, and turn off the main power switch. 2) Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. The machine remains powered after the main power switch is turned off as long as the power plug is connected to the power outlet.
Page 693: Replacing The Potential Sensor/Potential Control Pcb
Chapter 14 9) Fit the potential checker electrode (FY9-3041) [2] to the potential sensor [1]. 1) Check to make sure that the Execute/Memory lamp in the control panel is OFF, and turn off the main power switch. 2) Disconnect the power plug from the power outlet. The machine remains supplied with power as long as its power plug is connected to a power outlet even when its main power switch is turned off.
Page 694: Checking The Surface Potential Control System
Chapter 14 a. Outline If image faults occur, it is important to find out whether the cause is in the latent static image formation block (including the photosensitive drum and the potential control system) or it is in the developing/transfer system, requiring a check on the surface potential.
Page 695 Chapter 14 5) Turn off the power switch, and detach the door switch actuator. 6) Detach the jumper wire from the DC controller PCB. 7) Connect the connector to J3 of the potential control PCB. 8) Turn on the power switch. 2.
Page 696: Checking The Surface Potential Control System
Chapter 14 14.7.17 Checking the Surface Potential Control Make following selections service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>DPOT>DPOTK), and check to see that the System reading of initial rotation is between 0 and 30. 0008-8472 / iR8070 MEMO: If not, suspect a fault in the DC controller PCB. a.
Page 697: Checking The Environment Sensor
Chapter 14 14.7.18 Checking the Environment Sensor 0007-0793 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 1) Checking the Environment Sensor Make the following selections in service mode, and check and record the temperature/ humidity indicated on the screen in the control panel: COPIER> DISPLAY> ANALOG. Data A 'RTMP' deg C ...
Page 698 Chapter 14 The machine allows the use of a conventional meter or its service mode <Sensor> for checks on its photointerrupters: Fixing web length warning sensor (PS8) a. Using a Meter <Connector No.> 1) Set the meter range to 30 VDC. J508-B5 2) Connect the - probe of the meter to GND of the DC controller PCB.
Page 699 Chapter 14 Move the rear partitioning plate by hand in standby. <I/O address> Paper is put: 1 (5 V) P004-1 Paper is not put: 0 (0 V) <Checks> Move the detecting lever by hand in standby. <Sensor> The light-detecting plate is at PS31: 1 (5 V) Horizontal registration sensor (PS18) The light-blocking plate is not at PS31: 0 (0 V) <Connector No.>...
Page 700: Checking The Photointerrupters
Chapter 14 Cassette 4 lifter sensor (PS43) The light-blocking plate is not at PS52: - (0 V) <Connector No.> J517-A6 <Sensor> <I/O address> Left deck paper level middle sensor (PS54) P004-3 <Connector No.> <Checks> J514-B9 Move the detecting lever by hand in standby. <I/O address>...
Page 701 Chapter 14 <Connector> J508-A2 Turning on/off a sensor can start the machine's motor or the like. Take <I/O address> full care. P001-12 <Checks/ I/O/ Voltage> In standby, put paper over the detecting lever of PS9. When paper is put, 1(5V) <Sensor>...
Page 702 Chapter 14 In standby, move the detecting lever by hand. <Sensor> When the light-blocking plate is at PS24, 1(5V) Manual feed tray paper sensor(PS17) When the light-blocking plate is not at PS24, 0(0V) <Connector> J510-B8 <Sensor> <I/O address> Deck (left) pickup sensor(PS25) P004-12 <Connector>...
Page 703 Chapter 14 <I/O address> Cassette 4 lifter sensor(PS43) P004-15 <Connector> <Checks/ I/O/ Voltage> J517-A6 In standby, move the detecting lever by hand. <I/O address> When the light-blocking plate is at PS34, 1(5V) P004-3 When the light-blocking plate is not at PS34, 0(0V) <Checks/ I/O/ Voltage>...
Page 704: Checking The Photointerrupters
Chapter 14 When the light-blocking plate is at PS51, 1(5V) address. When the light-blocking plate is not at PS51, 0(0V) <Sensor> Deck (right) paper level high sensor(PS52) <Connector> Turning on/off a sensor can start the machine's motor or the like. Take J513-B12 full care.
Page 705 Chapter 14 In standby, put paper over the detecting lever of PS19. <Sensor> When paper is put, 1(5V) Duplexing reversal sensor(PS12) When paper is pulled, 0(0V) <Connector> J519-B6 <Sensor> <I/O address> Deck (right) pickup sensor(PS20) P002-1 <Connector> <Checks/ I/O/ Voltage> J511-B2 In standby, put paper over the detecting lever of PS12.
Page 706 Chapter 14 <I/O address> Cassette 3 lifter sensor(PS38) P001-8 <Connector> <Checks/ I/O/ Voltage> J515-A6 In standby, move the detecting lever by hand. <I/O address> When the light-blocking plate is at PS27, 1(5V) P004-2 When the light-blocking plate is not at PS27, 0(0V) <Checks/ I/O/ Voltage>...
Page 707: Checking The Optical Sensors
Chapter 14 When the light-blocking plate is not at PS45, 0(0V) P004-7 <Checks/ I/O/ Voltage> <Sensor> In standby, move the detecting lever by hand. Vertical path 4 sensor(PS46) When the light-blocking plate is at PS55, - (5V) <Connector> When the light-blocking plate is not at PS55, - (0V) J517-B8 <I/O address>...
Page 708: Checking The Photointerrupters
Chapter 14 Paper is at PS20: 1 (5 V) P002-5 Paper is not at PS20: 0 (0 V) <Checks> Put paper over PS60 in standby. <Sensor> Paper is at PS60: 1 (5 V) Left deck pickup sensor (PS25) Paper is not at PS60: 0 (0 V) <Connector No.>...
Page 709 Chapter 14 <Sensor> When paper is put, 1(5V) Outside delivery sensor(PS10) When paper is not put, 0(0V) <Connector> J508-A8 <Sensor> <I/O address> Horizontal registration sensor(PS18) P001-13 <Connector> <Checks/ I/O/ Voltage> J519-B11 In standby, put paper over the detecting lever of PS10. <I/O address>...
Page 710 Chapter 14 P001-1 <Connector> <Checks/ I/O/ Voltage> J510-B2 In standby, move the detecting lever by hand. <I/O address> When the light-blocking plate is at PS25, 1(5V) P001-10 When the light-blocking plate is not at PS25, 0(0V) <Checks/ I/O/ Voltage> In standby, move the detecting lever by hand. <Sensor>...
Page 711 Chapter 14 <Checks/ I/O/ Voltage> <Sensor> In standby, move the detecting lever by hand. Cassette 4 paper sensor(PS44) When the light-blocking plate is at PS52, - (5V) <Connector> When the light-blocking plate is not at PS52, - (0V) J517-A9 <I/O address> <Sensor>...
Page 712: Pickup/Feeding System
Chapter 14 14.8 Pickup/Feeding System - The rear pickup roller is silver-colored. When mounting the pickup roller [4] to the pickup assembly, be sure that the round marking [5] on the side of the roller and the round marking [6] on the collar (silver- 14.8.1 Orientation of the Deck/Cassette Pickup colored) are toward the rear of the machine.
Page 713: Orientation Of The Pickup Roller Of The Manual Feed Tray/Side Paper
Chapter 14 (direction of rotation) Collar (gold-colored) (rear of machine) (front) F-14-116 F-14-113 [4] Pickup roller [5] Marking (roller) 14.8.6 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Deck/ [6] Marking (collar) Cassette Pickup Assembly 14.8.8 Orientation of the Pickup Roller of the Manual 0008-8373 Feed Tray/Side Paper Deck / iR85+ / iR8070...
Page 714: Orientation For The Feeding Roller Of The Manual Feed Tray
Chapter 14 14.8.12 Orientation of the Feeding Roller of the Side When mounting the feeding roller assembly [1] to the manual feed tray pickup assembly, be sure that the belt pulley [2] is toward the front of Paper Deck the machine. When mounting the feeding roller [3] to the feeding roller shaft [4], be sure that the round marking [5] is toward the front of the 0008-8379 machine.
Page 715: Adjusting The Pressure Of The Separation Roller Of The Deck/Cassette
Chapter 14 Locking lever Pressure spring 14.8.14 Adjusting the Pressure of the Separation - If double feeding occurs, move the hook of the spring in the direction of A. Roller of the Deck/Cassette - If pickup failure occurs, move the hook of the spring in the direction of 0008-8380 / iR85+ / iR8070 If double feeding or pickup failure occurs during pickup, change the...
Page 716: Position Of The Solenoids
Chapter 14 SL 8 (if fixing web is not new) Solenoid (SL 2) F-14-129 F-14-133 SL 3 SL 9 / 10 Push fully. Solenoid (SL 3) F-14-134 F-14-130 - SL 11 No adjustment needed. SL 6 Side paper deck SL 101 Solenoid Solenoid (SL 6)
Page 717 Chapter 14 -SL4 SL 4 Solenoid (SL 4) 10.5±0.5mm F-14-140 SL11 -SL6 SL 6 SL10 Solenoid (SL 6) 0.4±0.2mm F-14-136 -SL2 SL 2 F-14-141 If the fixing web is new, -SL7 SL 7 Solenoid 8.2mm (SL 7) Solenoid (SL 2) F-14-137 If the fixing web has been in use, F-14-142...
Page 718: Location Of The Fixing Web Solenoid (Sl2)
Chapter 14 -SL101(Side paper deck) Side paper deck SL 101 Solenoid (SL 101) 8.2mm Screws F-14-145 F-14-148 14.8.19 Location of the Fixing Web Solenoid (SL2) b. If the Fixing Web Has Been in Use 0007-0632 Before removing the solenoid, take note of the position [A] of the drive iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 lever when the solenoid [1] is ON;...
Page 719: Position The Fixing/Feeder Unit Locking Solenoid (Sl4)
Chapter 14 is drawn. F-14-154 F-14-151 14.8.23 Position the Fixing/Feeder Unit Locking Solenoid (SL4) 0007-0639 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 Use the screw [3] to adjust the position of the solenoid [1] so that the locking lever [2] is 10.5 -/+ 0.5 mm away from the frame when the solenoid is ON (i.e., when the steel core is drawn).
Page 720: Position Of The Deck (Left) Pickup Solenoid (Sl8)
Chapter 14 plate is 34.0 -/+ 0.5 mm when the plunger of the pickup roller releasing solenoid is drawn (as occurring when [1] and [2] are operated as shown). (After adjustment, make sure that the distance between the paper face and the A roller is 2.5 -/+ 0.5 mm when the A roller is in UP position.) View from A F-14-160...
Page 721: Position For The Cassette 3/4 Pickup Solenoid (Sl9/10)
Chapter 14 F-14-164 14.8.34 Position of the Side Paper Deck Pickup View from A F-14-162 Roller Releasing Solenoid 14.8.32 Position for the Cassette 3/4 Pickup 0008-8426 Solenoid (SL9/10) / iR85+ / iR8070 Before removing the deck pickup roller releasing solenoid [1], be sure 0008-8424 to take note of the positions of the two fixing screws [2] of the solenoid / iR85+ / iR8070...
Page 722: Fitting The Drive Belt
Chapter 14 Butt the rack plate [1] of the manual feed tray against A (open state). Developing/waste toner drive belt Move the slide volume [2] in the direction of B, and attach the timing belt [3] to the pulley [4]. Main motor Pickup motor...
Page 723: Chapter 15 Correcting Faulty Images
Chapter 15 Correcting Faulty Images...
Page 725 Contents Contents 15.1 Making lnitial Checks ..............................15-1 15.1.1 Checking the Side of Installation ............................. 15-1 15.1.2 Checking the Originals ................................15-1 15.1.3 Checking the Copyboard Cover, Copyboard Glass, and Standard White Plate ..............15-1 15.1.4 Checking the Charging Assemblies ............................15-1 15.1.5 Checking the Developing Assembly............................
Page 726 Contents 15.2.7.2 E240 Error Code, Control panel locking up, power suddenly being shut down ..................15-14 15.2.7.3 E245/E246/E247 Error Code ..................................15-14 15.2.7.4 E350 Error Code ....................................... 15-14 15.2.7.5 E354 Error Code ....................................... 15-14 15.2.7.6 E355 Error Code ....................................... 15-15 15.2.7.7 E402 DADF-J1: ADF belt motor does not rotate Error Code .........................
Page 727 Contents 15.3.8.1 Side Paper Deck-N1 ....................................15-57 15.3.9 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB............... 15-58 15.3.9.1 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB ..................15-58 15.3.9.2 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB ..................15-59 15.3.9.3 Main Controller PCB ....................................15-59 15.3.9.4 Main Controller PCB ....................................15-59 15.3.9.5 Reader Controller PCB .....................................15-60...
Page 729: Making Lnitial Checks
Chapter 15 15.1 Making lnitial Checks 15.1.1 Checking the Side of Installation 0007-0810 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 Check the site of installation against the following requirements: a. The voltage of the power supply must be as rated (-/+ 10%). The power plug must remain connected day and night. b.
Page 730: Checking The Paper
0007-0821 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 a. Check to see if the paper is a type recommended by Canon. b. Check to see if the paper is moist. Try paper fresh out of package. 15.1.8 Checking the Periodically Replaced Parts...
Page 731: Lead Edge Voids Of Paper Due To Retransferring Ir105
Retransferring causes white spots at the leading edge of paper when non-recommended paper is used. Cause Separation charging current is determined based on Canon recommended paper. Since there are differences in the thickness and the surface resistance between Canon recommended and non-recommended paper, the separation charging current is not suitable for non-recommended paper and the retransferring problem will occur.
Page 732: E743-0000 Error Code
15.2.2.1.1 Fogging in the half of image/Solid black in the half of image: iR8500/iR105 0003-0713 iR8500 / iR105 / iR85 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Cause There are three cases found in our inspection that the CCD unit was faulty.
Page 733: Black Streaks In Sub-Scanning Direction/Abnormal Noise (Gear Teeth Chipping Sound) From Waste Toner Drive Ass'y
Chapter 15 1. Check the version of DCON ROM. The control sequence of the drum heater has been changed on Ver.3.01 for iR105 and Ver.30.06 for iR8500/7200. 2. Check whether the cleaning blade has not exceeded its life of five hundred thousand sheets. 3.
Page 734: No Power
Chapter 15 There are several cases in the field where paper dust caused this problem. So, try using Canon genuine paper in order to identify the cause. 15.2.2.3.4 Soiling at back of paper/Jam at fixing unit: because fixing lower roller shaft is scraped...
Page 735: Locking Up: Control Panel Locking Up With 'Printing' Message
Chapter 15 Inspected by Canon Inc. Symptom Title Locking up/Unable to boot up: Machine locking up at startup with 'Start up. Please wait.' message Symptom Cause As a result of inspection, the following were found: - The BOOT ROM is not securely fitted.
Page 736: User Warning Message
Chapter 15 15.2.3.3 User Warning Message 15.2.3.3.1 Solution for message 'Load paper.' in side paper deck (right) 0003-1359 iR8500 / iR7200 / iR105 / iR85 [ Case in the field ] Description 1. A message 'Load paper.' comes on during continuous copy from the side paper deck (right). 2.
Page 737: Other Defect
15.2.3.4 Other Defect 15.2.3.4.1 First copy time: It takes much time for first copy 0002-6225 iR8500 / iR105 / iR85 Verified by Canon Inc. Symptom First copy time: It takes much time for first copy Cause As a result of inspection, the scanning lamp was found to be faulty. To be more specific, both ends of the lamp were blackened.
Page 738: Jam (Main Unit)
Chapter 15 When LPR printing is executed by using LPR software via network under Windows95/Windows98/WindowsMe environment, the second data (job) is not output or it takes extremely longer (10 to 20 minutes). Cause This symptom will occur if the application software below is launched: Norton Internet Security 2001 ÅiNIS 2001Åj Norton Personal Firewall 2001 ÅiNPF 2001Åj Norton Anti Virus 2002 ÅiNAV 2002Åj...
Page 739 Chapter 15 For your information, contamination on the metal stay and the solenoid arm caused this problem in the field. Image1 F-15-5 Image2 F-15-6 Image3 15-11...
Page 740: Jam (Fin)
Chapter 15 F-15-7 15.2.6 Jam (FIN) 15.2.6.1 JAM CODE 1123 Paper Folding Unit-C1 0003-1606 iR8500 / iR7200 / iR105 / iR85 [ Case in the field ] Description JAM CODE 1123 is a stationary jam at the feed path paper sensor 3 (S8) of the paper folding unit-C1. Cause There is a case in the field that the optical axis of the feed path paper sensor 3 was misaligned.
Page 741: Jam Code 1129/E577 Error Code: Fin-K1/K2/K3/K4/K1N/K2/K3N
15.2.6.2 JAM CODE 1129/E577 Error Code: FIN-K1/K2/K3/K4/K1N/K2/K3N 0003-1334 iR8500 / iR7200 / iR105 / iR85 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Description E577: The paddle home position sensor does not sense the paddle within 5 secs. after the paddle motor (M9) is started.
Page 742: E240 Error Code, Control Panel Locking Up, Power Suddenly Being Shut Down
Chapter 15 Inspect the primary charging ass'y for soil, contaminations, or abnormalities such as leakage at the block for the charging wire. Also, check whether poor contact occurs between the ass'y and the host machine. If there is no anomaly, check the connection of T601, J723 and J730 on the HV-DC transformer PCB. If there is no problem, replace the PCB with a new one.
Page 743: E355 Error Code
15.2.7.7 E402 DADF-J1: ADF belt motor does not rotate Error Code 0003-1224 iR8500 / iR7200 / iR105 / iR85 [ Inspected by Canon Inc. ] Description The main causes of E402 are: 1. The belt motor (M2) in the ADF is faulty.
Page 744: Card Reader-D1: How To Print List Of Print Totals By Each Department
A3, B4, A4, B5, A5R, A4R, B5R, 279.4 × 431.8mm (11 × 17), LGL, LTR, LTRR, STMT (vertical feed) - Eco paper (80 g/m2) A3, A4, A4R - Colored paper (Canon-recommended) B4, A4, A4R - Thick paper (90 to 200 g/m2)
Page 745 15.2.8.1.5 List of versions for System Software and compliant ROMs for USA as of 2003/07/14 0003-1351 iR8500 / iR7200 / iR105 / iR85 [ Verified by Canon Inc. ] Description The following table shows combinations for the system software (host machine) and the compliant ROM versions.
Page 746: Faq On Send Specifications
Chapter 15 8.27 Versions in bold type: the latest version Versions in standard (not bold) type: applicable versions that can be used with the system software 15.2.8.1.6 Explanations about 'FIX-WEB' (Fixing Web Counter) in service mode 0003-1361 iR8500 / iR7200 / iR105 / iR85 [ Manual-related ] Field Remedy There are two different 'FIX-WEB' in service mode:...
Page 747: Outline Of Electrical Components
Chapter 15 15.3 Outline of Electrical Components 15.3.1 Clutch/Solenoid 15.3.1.1 Clutches 0007-0924 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 CL20 CL18 CL10 CL12 CL11 CL17 CL16 CL19 CL13 CL21 CL14 CL15 F-15-10 T-15-2 Name Notation Function Inside hopper magnet roller drive clutch Drives the inside hopper magnet roller. Registration clutch Drives the registration roller.
Page 748: Clutches
Chapter 15 15.3.1.2 Clutches 0008-9301 / iR8070 CL20 CL18 CL10 CL12 CL11 CL17 CL16 CL13 CL19 CL21 CL14 CL15 F-15-11 T-15-3 Name Notation Function Inside hopper magnet roller drive clutch Drives the inside hopper magnet roller. Registration clutch Drives the registration roller. Registration brake clutch Drives the registration brake.
Page 749: Solenoids
Chapter 15 CL20 CL18 CL10 CL12 CL11 CL17 CL16 CL13 CL19 CL21 CL14 CL15 F-15-12 T-15-4 Name Notation Function Inside hopper magnet roller drive clutch Drives the inside hopper magnet roller. Registration clutch Drives the registration roller. Registration brake clutch Drives the registration brake.
Page 750: Solenoids
Chapter 15 SL11 SL10 F-15-13 T-15-5 Name Notation Fixing web solenoid Delivery flapper solenoid Fixing/feeder unit locking solenoid Manual feed pickup latch solenoid Deck (right) pickup solenoid Deck (left) pickup solenoid Cassette 3 pickup solenoid Cassette 4 pickup solenoid SL10 Reversing flapper solenoid SL11 15.3.1.5 Solenoids...
Page 751: Solenoids
Chapter 15 SL11 SL10 F-15-14 T-15-6 Name Notation Fixing web solenoid Delivery flapper solenoid Fixing/feeder unit locking solenoid Manual feed pickup latch solenoid Deck (right) pickup solenoid Deck (left) pickup solenoid Cassette 3 pickup solenoid Cassette 4 pickup solenoid SL10 Reversing flapper solenoid SL11 15.3.1.6 Solenoids...
Page 752: Motor
Chapter 15 SL11 SL10 F-15-15 T-15-7 Name Notation Fixing web solenoid Delivery flapper solenoid Fixing/feeder unit locking solenoid Manual feed pickup latch solenoid Deck (right) pickup solenoid Deck (left) pickup solenoid Cassette 3 pickup solenoid Cassette 4 pickup solenoid SL10 Reversing flapper solenoid SL11 15.3.2 Motor...
Page 753: Motors
Chapter 15 F-15-16 T-15-8 Name Notation Drum motor Main motor Pickup motor Fixing motor Laser scanner motor Scanner motor Inside cartridge toner feeder motor Pre-transfer charging wire cleaner motor Primary charging wire cleaner motor Transfer/separation charging wire cleaner motor Vibration motor M10/M20 Duplex reversal motor Duplex feeder motor (left)
Page 754: Motors
Chapter 15 F-15-17 T-15-9 Name Notation Drum motor Main motor Pickup motor Fixing motor Laser scanner motor Inside cartridge toner feeder motor Pre-transfer charging wire cleaner motor Primary charging wire cleaner motor Transfer/separation charging wire cleaner motor Duplex reversal motor Duplex feeder motor (left) Deck (right) lifter motor Deck (left) lifter motor...
Page 755: Motors
Chapter 15 M101 F-15-18 T-15-10 Name Notation Drum motor Main motor Pickup motor Fixing motor Laser scanner motor Inside cartridge toner feeder motor Pre-transfer charging wire cleaner motor Primary charging wire cleaner motor Transfer/separation charging wire cleaner motor Duplex reversal motor Duplex feeder motor (left) Deck (right) lifter motor Deck (left) lifter motor...
Page 756: Fan
Chapter 15 F-15-19 T-15-11 Name Notation Drum motor Main motor Pickup motor Fixing motor Laser scanner motor Scanner motor Inside cartridge toner feeder motor Pre-transfer charging wire cleaner motor Primary charging wire cleaner motor Transfer/separation charging wire cleaner motor Duplex reversal motor Duplex feeder motor (left) Deck (right) lifter motor Deck (left) lifter motor...
Page 757: Fans
Chapter 15 FM18 FM10 FM15 FM20 FM13 FM16 FM17 FM19 FM11 FM12 F-15-20 T-15-12 Name Notation Laser motor cooling fan Fixing heat discharge fan Laser cooling fan 1 Stream reading fan Laser cooling fan 2 Curl-reducing fan Drum fan Inverter cooling fan Pre-transfer charging assembly fan FM10 Power supply cooling fan 1...
Page 758: Fans
Chapter 15 FM10 FM15 FM13 FM14 FM16 FM17 FM11 FM12 F-15-21 T-15-13 Name Notation Laser motor cooling fan Fixing heat discharge fan Laser cooling fan 1 Laser cooling fan 2 Curl-reducing fan feeding fan Drum fan Pre-transfer charging assembly fan FM10 Power supply cooling fan 1 FM11...
Page 759: Fans
Chapter 15 FM10 FM15 FM13 FM14 FM16 FM17 FM11 FM12 F-15-22 T-15-14 Name Notation Laser motor cooling fan Fixing heat discharge fan Laser cooling fan 1 Laser cooling fan 2 Curl-reducing fan feeding fan Drum fan Pre-transfer charging assembly fan FM10 Power supply cooling fan 1 FM11...
Page 760: Sensor
Chapter 15 FM20 FM10 FM15 FM13 FM14 FM16 FM17 FM11 FM12 F-15-23 T-15-15 Name Notation Laser motor cooling fan Fixing heat discharge fan Laser cooling fan 1 Stream reading fan Laser cooling fan 2 Curl-reducing fan feeding fan Drum fan Inverter cooling fan Pre-transfer charging assembly fan FM10...
Page 761 Chapter 15 PS60 PS59 PS35 PS47 PS10 PS49 PS28 PS41 PS11 PS38 PS37 PS52 PS51 PS40 PS39 PS19 PS46 PS55 PS54 PS42 PS43 PS44 PS45 PS57 PS17 PS56 PS26 PS58 PS20 PS14 PS27 PS15 PS61 PS24 PS12 PS18 PS21 PS22 PS25 PS34 PS23...
Page 762: Sensor 1
Chapter 15 Name Notation Left deck feed sensor PS26 Right deck feed sensor PS27 Fixing/feeder unit releasing lever sensor PS28 Left deck lifter sensor PS31 Left deck paper sensor PS32 Left deck open/closed sensor PS33 Left deck open/closed sensor PS34 Manual feed feeder inlet sensor PS35 Cassette 3 pickup sensor...
Page 763 Chapter 15 PS59 PS35 PS16 PS47 PS10 PS49 PS28 PS41 PS11 PS38 PS37 PS52 PS51 PS39 PS40 PS19 PS46 PS55 PS42 PS54 PS43 PS44 PS45 PS17 PS56 PS15 PS20 PS14 PS27 PS26 PS13 PS24 PS58 PS12 PS21 PS18 PS25 PS22 PS34 PS23 PS31...
Page 764: Sensor 1
Chapter 15 Name Notation Left deck feed sensor PS26 Right deck feed sensor PS27 Fixing/feeder unit releasing lever sensor PS28 Left deck lifter sensor PS31 Left deck paper sensor PS32 Left deck open/closed sensor PS33 Left deck open/closed sensor PS34 Manual feed feeder inlet sensor PS35 Cassette 3 pickup sensor...
Page 765 Chapter 15 PS59 PS35 PS16 PS47 PS10 PS49 PS28 PS41 PS11 PS38 PS37 PS52 PS51 PS39 PS40 PS19 PS46 PS55 PS54 PS42 PS43 PS44 PS45 PS57 PS17 PS56 PS15 PS20 PS14 PS27 PS26 PS13 PS24 PS58 PS12 PS21 PS18 PS25 PS22 PS34 PS23...
Page 766: Sensor 1
Chapter 15 Name Notation Right deck paper sensor PS22 Right deck open/closed sensor PS23 Right deck limit sensor PS24 Left deck pickup sensor PS25 Left deck feed sensor PS26 Right deck feed sensor PS27 Fixing/feeder unit releasing lever sensor PS28 Left deck lifter sensor PS31 Left deck paper sensor...
Page 767 Chapter 15 PS59 PS35 PS16 PS47 PS10 PS49 PS28 PS41 PS11 PS38 PS37 PS52 PS51 PS39 PS40 PS19 PS46 PS55 PS54 PS42 PS43 PS44 PS45 PS101 PS102 PS103 PS17 PS56 PS15 PS20 PS14 PS27 PS26 PS13 PS58 PS24 PS12 PS21 PS18 PS25 PS22...
Page 768: Sensor 2
Chapter 15 Name Notation Right deck open/closed sensor PS23 Right deck limit sensor PS24 Left deck pickup sensor PS25 Left deck feed sensor PS26 Right deck feed sensor PS27 Fixing/feeder unit releasing lever sensor PS28 Left deck lifter sensor PS31 Left deck paper sensor PS32 Left deck open/closed sensor...
Page 769: Sensor 2
Chapter 15 SIZE4 SIZE3 SVR1 SIZE2 SIZE1 SVR2 SVR3 F-15-28 T-15-20 Name Notation Original size sensor 1 SIZE1 Original side sensor 2 SIZE2 Original side sensor 3 SIZE3 Original size sensor 4 SIZE4 Cassette 3 paper length sensor Cassette 4 paper length sensor Manual feed tray paper width detecting volume SVR1 Cassette 3 paper width detecting volume...
Page 770: Sensor 2
Chapter 15 SVR1 SVR2 SVR3 F-15-29 T-15-21 Name Notation Cassette 3 paper length sensor Cassette 4 paper length sensor Manual feed tray paper width detecting volume SVR1 Cassette 3 paper width detecting volume SVR2 Cassette 4 paper width detecting volume SVR3 Inside hopper toner sensor Inside hopper toner lower limit sensor...
Page 771: Sensor 2
Chapter 15 SVR1 SVR2 SVR3 F-15-30 T-15-22 Name Notation Cassette 3 paper length sensor Cassette 4 paper length sensor Manual feed tray paper width detecting volume SVR1 Cassette 3 paper width detecting volume SVR2 Cassette 4 paper width detecting volume SVR3 Inside hopper toner sensor Inside hopper toner lower limit sensor...
Page 772: Switch
Chapter 15 SIZE4 SIZE3 SVR1 SIZE2 SIZE1 SVR2 SVR3 F-15-31 T-15-23 Name Notation Original size sensor 1 SIZE1 Original side sensor 2 SIZE2 Original side sensor 3 SIZE3 Original size sensor 4 SIZE4 Cassette 3 paper length sensor Cassette 4 paper length sensor Manual feed tray paper width detecting volume SVR1 Cassette 3 paper width detecting volume...
Page 773: Switches
Chapter 15 MSW8 MSW1 MSW2 MSW5 MSW7 F-15-32 T-15-24 Name Notation Main switch Front cover switch Drum heater switch Cartridge detecting switch MSW1 Waste toner clog detecting switch MSW2 Manual feed tray cover open/closed detecting switch MSW5 Front cover open/closed detecting switch MSW7 Cartridge motor drive switch MSW8...
Page 774: Switches
Chapter 15 MSW8 MSW1 MSW2 MSW5 MSW7 F-15-33 T-15-25 Name Notation Main switch Front cover switch Drum heater switch Cartridge detecting switch MSW1 Waste toner clog detecting switch MSW2 Manual feed tray cover open/closed detecting switch MSW5 Front cover open/closed detecting switch MSW7 Cartridge motor drive switch MSW8...
Page 775: Lamps, Heaters, And Others
Chapter 15 MSW8 MSW1 MSW2 MSW5 MSW7 F-15-34 T-15-26 Name Notation Main switch Front cover switch Drum heater switch Cartridge detecting switch MSW1 Waste toner clog detecting switch MSW2 Manual feed tray cover open/closed detecting switch MSW5 Front cover open/closed detecting switch MSW7 Cartridge motor drive switch MSW8...
Page 776: Lamp, Heater, And Others
Chapter 15 LED1 LED2 ELCB1 F-15-35 T-15-27 Name Notation Description Scanning lamp (fluorescent lamp) Scanning lamp Heater Fixing main heater Fixing sub heater Drum heater Cassette heater Scanning amp heater Thermistor Fixing heater main thermistor Fixing heater sub thermistor (edge) Thermal switch Fixing heater thermal switch Leakage breaker...
Page 777: Lamp, Heater, And Others
Chapter 15 LED1 LED2 ELCB1 F-15-36 T-15-28 Name Notation Description Heater Fixing main heater Fixing sub heater Drum heater Cassette heater (208V:None 230V:option) Thermistor Fixing main thermistor Fixing sub thermistor Thermal switch Fixing heater thermal switch Leakage breaker ELCB1 Leakage breaker Pre-exposure lamp LED1 Pre-exposure lamp...
Page 778: Lamp, Heater, And Others
Chapter 15 LA101 H102 LED1 H101 LED2 ELCB1 F-15-37 T-15-29 Name Notation Description Scanning lamp (xenon lamp) LA101 Scanning lamp (xenon lamp) Heater Fixing main heater Fixing sub heater Drum heater Cassette heater H101 Lens heater H102 Mirror heater Thermistor Fixing main thermistor Fixing sub thermistor Thermal switch...
Page 779: Pcbs
Chapter 15 LED1 LED2 ELCB1 F-15-38 T-15-30 Name Notation Description Scanning lamp (fluorescent lamp) Scanning lamp Heater Fixing main heater Fixing sub heater Drum heater Cassette heater Scanning lamp heater Thermistor Fixing main thermistor Fixing sub thermistor Thermal switch Fixing heater thermal switch Leakage breaker ELCB1 Leakage breaker...
Page 780 Chapter 15 [35] [34] [33] [27] [31] [16] [26] [28] [19] [29] [18] [17] [23] [22] [24] [20] [13] [25] [10] [14] [11] [15] [12] [32] F-15-39 T-15-31 Name Notation Function CCD/AP PCB PCB1 Drives the CCD/processes analog images. Reader controller PCB PCB2 Controls the reader unit.
Page 781: Pcbs
Chapter 15 Name Notation Function AC driver PCB PCB20 Drive the fixing heater. Environment sensor PCB PCB22 Detects the machine outside temperature/ humidity. Stackless feeder driver PCB PCB23 Drives the duplex/feeder unit. Cassette 3 paper level detection PCB PCB24 Detects the level of paper in the cassette 3. Cassette 4 paper level detection PCB PCB25 Detects the level of paper in the cassette 4.
Page 782: Pcbs
Chapter 15 T-15-32 Name Notation Function Pixel/line conversion PCB PCB3 Executes pixel/line conversion. Main controller PCB PCB5 Controls the system. DC controller PCB PCB6 Controls the printer unit. Laser driver PCB 1 PCB7 Drives the laser diode. Laser driver PCB 2 PCB8 Controls the laser intensity.
Page 783 Chapter 15 [27] [31] [16] [26] [28] [31] [19] [32] [31] [29] [30] [18] [17] [23] [22] [24] [20] [13] [25] [10] [14] [11] [15] [12] [30] F-15-41 T-15-33 Name Notation Function CCD/AP PCB PCB1 Drives the CCD/processes analog images. Reader controller PCB PCB2 Controls the reader unit.
Page 784: Pcbs
Chapter 15 Name Notation Function AC driver PCB PCB20 Drive the fixing heater. Environment sensor PCB PCB22 Detects the machine outside temperature/ humidity. Stackless feeder driver PCB PCB23 Drives the duplex/feeder unit. Cassette 3 paper level detection PCB PCB24 Detects the level of paper in the cassette 3. Cassette 4 paper level detection PCB PCB25 Detects the level of paper in the cassette 4.
Page 785: Plane Pedistal
Chapter 15 T-15-34 Name Notation Function Pixel/line conversion PCB PCB3 Executes pixel/line conversion. Differential PCB PCB4 Executes communication signal conversion. Main controller PCB PCB5 Controls the system. DC controller PCB PCB6 Controls the printer unit. Laser driver PCB 1 PCB7 Drives the laser diode.
Page 786: Variable Resistors (Vr), Light-Emitting Diodes (Led), And Check Pins By Pcb
Chapter 15 PCB2 PCB1 F-15-44 T-15-35 Name Notation Deck pickup sensor Deck paper absent sensor Deck lifter upper limit sensor Deck lift position sensor Deck set sensor Deck feed sensor Deck paper supply position sensor Deck paper level sensor Compartment open sensor Compartment open detecting switch Deck lifter lower limit detecting switch Compartment open switch...
Page 787: Main Controller Pcb
Chapter 15 Do not touch the VRs and check pins not discussed herein. They are exclusively for use at the factory, and require special tools and high precision. 15.3.9.2 Variable Resistors (VR), Light-Emitting Diodes (LED), and Check Pins by PCB 0008-9409 / iR85+ / iR8070 Of the variable VRs, LEDs, and switches used in the machine, those needed when servicing in the field are discussed.
Page 788: Reader Controller Pcb
Chapter 15 J1006 J1004 J1027 J3000 J1003 J1017 LED1003 J3001 J1021 J1028 J1010 1004 J1008 LED1006 J1013 J1061 LED1008 1001 J1026 J1015 J1023 J1024 J1014 J1022 J1018 J1060 J1062 F-15-46 15.3.9.5 Reader Controller PCB 0007-1029 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 J1104 J1110 J1109 J1101 J1112...
Page 789: Reader Controller Pcb
Chapter 15 J1104 J1110 J1109 J1101 J1112 J1103 BAT1 J1108 J1107 J1116 J1106 J1113 J1102 J1114 F-15-48 15.3.9.7 Reader Controller PCB 0008-9412 / iR8070 J5021 J5009 J5015 J5013 SW5001 J5014 J5005 J5007 J5012 J5006 J5002 J5001 J5008 J5004 F-15-49 T-15-36 SW5001-1 SW5001-2 Inch series.
Page 790: Dc Controller Pcb
Chapter 15 15.3.9.9 DC controller PCB 0008-9415 / iR85+ / iR8070 J511 J510 J509 J508 J523 J507 J512 J506 J513 J525 J514 J526 J515 J521 J527 J516 BAT1 J520 J517 J522 J505 J518 J501 J519 J502 J503 J504 F-15-51 15.3.9.10 HV-DC PCB 0007-1032 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 J732 J737...
Page 791 Chapter 15 J732 J737 J733 1 2 1 down Settings SW101 J731 J734 J721 J722 J723 F-15-53 The slide switch (SW101) is for factory use only, and is not used for servicing work in the field (Keep it as it is set at the factory). 15-63...
Page 793 Chapter 16 Self Diagnosis...
Page 795 Contents Contents 16.1 Error Code Table................................16-1 16.1.1 Outline...................................... 16-1 16.1.2 Outline...................................... 16-1 16.1.3 Error Code List ..................................16-1 16.1.4 Error Code List ..................................16-3 16.1.5 Error Code List ..................................16-4 16.2 Error Code Details ..............................16-6 16.2.1 Error Code Detail ..................................16-6 16.2.2 Error Code Detail ...................................
Page 797: Error Code Table
Chapter 16 16.1 Error Code Table 16.1.1 Outline 0007-1248 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 The CPU on the machine's main controller PCB and DC controller PCB is equipped with a self diagnostic mechanism that monitors the condition of the machine (especially of the sensors); upon detection of a fault, it indicates the fact in the control panel using an error code. A description of each code and the timing of its detection are as discussed hereafter;...
Page 798 Chapter 16 T-16-1 Code Description E000 The temperature of the fixing assembly is abnormally high. E001 The over-rising in temperature of the fixing assembly is detected. E002 The rise in temperature of the fixing assembly is faulty. E003 The fixing temperature is too low after a standby state. E004 The fixing assembly is faulty.
Page 799: Error Code List
Chapter 16 Code Description E733 There is an error in the communication with the printer. E740 There is an error on the Ethernet board. E744 There is an error in the language file/boot ROM. E745 There is a fault on the TokenRing board. E746 The accessories board is of the wrong type.
Page 800: Error Code List
Chapter 16 Code Description E602 There is an error on the hard disk. E604 The image memory is faulty or is inadequate. E609 There is an error on the HDD. E610 The HDD coding key is faulty. E710 There is an error in the initialization of the IPC. E711 There is an error in the IPC communication.
Page 801 Chapter 16 Code Description E243 The communication between the control panel PCB and MCON is faulty. E602 There is an error on the hard disk. E604 The image memory is faulty or is inadequate. E609 There is an error on the HDD. E610 The HDD coding key is faulty.
Page 802: Error Code Details
Chapter 16 16.2 Error Code Details 16.2.1 Error Code Detail 0008-6182 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 T-16-4 Code Cause Remedy E000 The temperature of the fixing assembly is abnormally high. 0000 When the main power switch is turned on, the - Check if the main thermistor is mounted properly and reading of the main thermistor does not reach also check if there is no contamination.
Page 803 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0001 The reading of the main thermistor does not - Check if the connector (J505) of the DC controller reach 150 deg C within 2 min 30 sec after it has PCB is mounted properly and also check if the exceeded 100 deg C.
Page 804 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0000 The waste toner feed screw fails to rotate - Re-mount the waste toner pipe. normally, and the switch MSW2 is pressed - Replace the waste toner pipe. multiple times within a specific period of time. - Replace the waste toner clog detecting switch.
Page 805 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0003 The horizontal registration detection - Replace the horizontal registration sensor. movement for the preceding sheet does not end - Replace the horizontal registration motor. within 5 sec at the start of a horizontal - Check if the manual feed tray open/closed detecting registration search during printing.
Page 806 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0000 Scanner home position cannot be detected Caution within a specific period of time after the power No code will be indicated. The keys will be locked. You switch is turned on or the Start key is pressed. can check the code in service mode (COPIER>DISPLAY>ERR).
Page 807 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0001 When the orientation of an original is detected, - Replace the original orientation PCB. the result of detection is not communicated by - Replace the reader controller PCB. the original orientation detection PCB until the next original is read.
Page 808 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy E420 The EEPROM is faulty. The ADF controller PCB is faulty. 0000 The backup data of the EEPROM cannot be - Replace the ADF controller PCB. read when the connected device is tuned on. Or, the data that has been read has a fault. E602 There is an error on the hard disk.
Page 809 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy E717 There is an error in the communication with the NE controller. 0001 The NE controller is not connected at power Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in service on, although it was connected before the power mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR.
Page 810 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0001 There is a DDI-P communication error. - Check the connection with the printer. - Check the power supply of the printer (to see if initialization takes place at startup). - Replace the DC controller or the main controller PCB. E740 There is an error on the Ethernet board.
Page 811: Error Code Detail
Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0002 The lock signal is detected for 5 sec or more - Check if there is no foreign material in the rotation although the separation heat discharging fan is assembly of the separation heat discharging fan. being driven.
Page 812 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0004 The reading of the main thermistor is lower - Check if the main thermistor is mounted properly. than that of the sub thermistor by 50 deg C or - Replace the main thermistor. more for 1 sec. - Replace the AC driver PCB.
Page 813 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0000 The length of the fixing web that has been - Check the position of the fixing web detection lever. taken up is more than a specific value and the - Replace the fixing web. fixing web length sensor (PS7) has detected - Replace the fixing web length sensor.
Page 814 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0000 The DC controller PCB detects an overcurrent - Check if the connector (J512) of the DC controller flowing to the toner feed motor (M6) inside the PCB is mounted properly. cartridge for 10 sec or more twice. (In response - Replace the toner feed motor (M6).
Page 815 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0000 The constant speed rotation signal (LM-RDY) - Check if the connector (J762) of the laser scanner does not arrive for 20 sec or more after the motor driver PCB is mounted properly. laser scanner motor (M4) drive signal has been - Check if the connector (J503) of the DC controller generated.
Page 816 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0000 A communication fault exists between the - Replace the control panel PCB. CPUs of the control panel PCB and the main - Replace the main controller PCB. controller PCB. E248 Backup (EEPROM) error 0001 The ID read into the EEPROM when the main - Check if the EEPROM is mounted properly.
Page 817 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 09XX /DOSDEV5 is faulty. See the details under E602. FFXX There is an error in a partition that cannot be See the details under E602. identified. E604 The image memory is faulty or is inadequate. 0000 The memory size does not match the model.
Page 818 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0011 An error has occurred at new card reader Check the cable; thereafter, reset the condition in service startup. mode: COPIER>FUNCTION>CLEAR>ERR. The new card reader is not connected when the power is turned off, although it was connected when the power was turned off.
Page 819 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0004 There is a connection error. - Check the connection the cable. - Replace the cable. - Check the power source of the MAU. - Replace the MAU. - Replace the TokenRing board. 0005 Other Errors E746 The accessories board is of the wrong type.
Page 820: Error Code Detail
Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0000 The lock signal is detected for 5 sec or more - Check if there is no foreign material in the rotation although the separation cooling fan is being assembly of the separation cooling fan. driven.
Page 821 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0000 The reading of the main thermistor (TH1) does - Check if the connector (J505) of the DC controller not reach 100 deg C 2 min 30 sec after it has PCB is mounted properly and also check if the exceeded 70 deg C.
Page 822 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0000 No clock pulse arrive for 2 sec or more after - Check if the connecter (J611, J612) of the main motor the main motor drive signal (MMFG) has been is mounted properly. generated. - Check if the connector (J1720) of the relay PCB is mounted properly.
Page 823 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0001 Departure from home position is not detected - Replace the horizontal registration sensor. within 5 sec during a horizontal registration - Replace the horizontal registration motor. home position search. - Check if the manual feed tray open/closed detecting switch is mounted properly.
Page 824 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0002 The lock signal arrives for 5 sec or more - Check if there is no foreign material in the rotation although the laser cooling fan 2 (FM5) is being assembly of the laser cooling fan 2. driven.
Page 825 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0000 The communications IC (IPC) on the finisher - Check if the communication cable between the finisher controller PCB goes out of order. and main body is connected properly. - Replace the finisher controller PCB. - Replace the DC controller PCB.
Page 826 Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0001 There is a DDI-P communication error. - Check the connection with the printer. - Check the power supply of the printer (to see if initialization takes place at startup). - Replace the DC controller or the main controller PCB. E740 There is an error on the Ethernet board.
Page 827: E602 In Detaill
Chapter 16 Code Cause Remedy 0000 The lock signal is detected for 5 sec or more - Check if there is no foreign material in the rotation although the drum fan is being driven. assembly of the drum fan. - Check if the connector (J512) of the DC controller PCB is mounted properly.
Page 828 Chapter 16 Description Remedy Symptom absent The system software of the sub CPU does 1. Start up in safe mode, and execute full formatting using not exist. the SST and re-install the system software (System, Language, RUI); then, turn off and then back on the main power.
Page 829 Chapter 16 T-16-9 CHK- Partition in Description Typical item Normal mode Safe mode + TYPE question deleted formatting by + HDD HD-CLEAR formatting formatting with with SST DOSDEV General data Entire Possible (4 FSTDEV Possible; storage area collection of partitions, specified (4 however, image data...
Page 830 Chapter 16 CHK- Partition in Description Typical item Normal mode Safe mode + TYPE question deleted formatting by + HDD HD-CLEAR formatting formatting with with SST DOSDEV4 Firmware Address book Not possible DOSDEV4 Possible; storage area specified however, (address book, selection of a filter) specific partition...
Page 831 Chapter 16 Description Remedy The ongoing write operation has been To run a recovery session for the boot partition, suspended (at startup). you will have to use safe mode in combination with the SST. 1. Set '0' for TYPE-TYPE, and execute HDD- CHECK (40 to 50 min).
Page 832 Chapter 16 Description Remedy 13, 25 The ongoing write operation has been There is a likelihood of the presence of damage to suspended. the file data on the HDD (e.g., Box). 1. Set '0' for TYPE-TYPE, and execute HDD- CHECK (40 to 50 min). Thereafter, turn off and then back on the power.
Page 833: Jam Code
Chapter 16 16.3 Jam Code 16.3.1 Jam Code (Main Body-related) 0007-0520 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 T-16-11 FF: Type of Copier Jam Code Type 01xx delay jam 02xx stationary jam 0Axx power-on residual jam 0Bxx front cover open jam T-16-12 ff: Copier Jam Sensor Code Sensor xx00...
Page 834: Jam Code (Finisher-Related)
Chapter 16 Code Type 02xx stationary jam 0Axx power-on residual jam 0Bxx front cover open jam T-16-14 ff: Jam Sensor in Main Body Code Sensor xx00 no sensor in particular xx01 right deck pickup sensor (PS20) xx02 left deck pickup sensor (PS25) xx03 cassette 3 pickup sensor (PS37) xx04...
Page 835: Jam Code (Adf-Related)
Chapter 16 ff: Finisher Jam Sensor Code Sensor xx00 no sensor in particular xx11 fold path paper residual sensor 1 delay jam (PI73) xx12 fold path paper residual sensor 2 delay jam (PI77) xx13 fold path paper residual sensor 3 delay jam (PI75) xx14 fold path paper residual sensor 4 delay jam (PI74) xx15...
Page 836 Chapter 16 Code Sensor 0019 residual original 001A 1st sheet pickup trailing edge skew rear 001B 1st sheet reversal pickup trailing edge rear 001C 1st sheet pickup fault 1 001D 1st sheet pickup fault 2 001E 1st sheet reversal delay 001F 1st sheet reversal pickup fault 1 0022...
Page 837: Jam Code (Adf-Related)
Chapter 16 Code Sensor 00A4 manual feed delivery delay 00A5 manual feed residual original 00A6 manual feed original size error 00E1 ADF open 00E2 cover open 00E3 cycle NG 00E4 initial stay 00E5 timing error 00E6 original size error 00E7 user ADF open 00E8 user cover open...
Page 838: Alarm Code
Chapter 16 16.4 Alarm Code 16.4.1 Alarm Code 0007-0636 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 T-16-19 EE Location code ffff Code error code 0804 system fan alarm (detail code: 0004) reader assembly (scanner) 0003 dust detection small 1 0004 dust detection small 2 0005 dust detection small 3 0006...
Page 839: Alarm Code
Chapter 16 EE Location code ffff Code sorter/finisher puncher system 0001 punch waste case full 16.4.2 Alarm Code 0008-8496 / iR8070 T-16-20 EE Location code ffff Code error code 0804 system fan alarm (detail code: 0004) pickup/feeding system 0001 right deck lifter alarm 0002 left deck lifter alarm 0003...
Page 840 Chapter 16 EE Location code ffff Code pickup/feeding system 0001 right deck lifter alarm 0002 left deck lifter alarm 0003 cassette 3 lifter alarm 0004 cassette 4 lifter alarm 0007 manual feed tray lifter alarm 0008 side paper deck lifter alarm 0011 right deck retry alarm 0012...
Page 841 Chapter 17 Service Mode...
Page 843 Contents Contents 17.1 Outline..................................17-1 17.1.1 Construction of Service Mode(iR105)............................. 17-1 17.1.2 Service mode screen configuration ............................17-1 17.1.3 Service mode screen configuration ............................17-2 17.1.4 Starting Service Mode and Making Selections(iR105) ......................17-3 17.1.5 Entering or selecting service modes ............................17-4 17.1.6 Entering or selecting service modes ............................
Page 844 Contents 17.4.3.2 Sorter List ......................................... 17-92 17.4.3.3 Sorter List ......................................... 17-93 17.4.3.4 Sorter List ......................................... 17-93 17.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode) ......................17-95 17.5.1 COPIER ....................................17-95 17.5.1.1 Copier List ........................................ 17-95 17.5.1.2 Copier List ......................................17-103 17.5.1.3 Copier List ......................................17-112 17.5.1.4 Copier List ......................................
Page 845: Service Mode Screen Configuration
Chapter 17 17.1 Outline 17.1.1 Construction of Service Mode(iR105) 0007-0318 iR105 The service mode screens are arranged in a 3-level construction: Initial screen, Level 1/2 screen, Level 3 screen. User screen ( )(2,8)( ) Reset key Initial screen Reset key Item selected Level 1/2 screen...
Page 846: Service Mode Screen Configuration
Chapter 17 User screen )(2,8)( Reset key Initial screen (Level 1) Initial screen )(2) (Level 2) (Select an item.) Main/intermediate (Select an item.) item screen (Level 1) Main/intermediate (Select a main item from the top of screen.) item screen (The corresponding intermediate items are (Level 2) then displayed and can be selected.) (Select a main item from the top of screen.)
Page 847: Starting Service Mode And Making Selections(Ir105)
Chapter 17 User screen )(2,8)( Reset key Initial screen (Level 1) Initial screen )(2) (Level 2) (Select an item.) Main/intermediate (Select an item.) item screen (Level 1) Main/intermediate (Select a main item from the top of screen.) item screen (The corresponding intermediate items are (Level 2) then displayed and can be selected.) (Select a main item from the top of screen.)
Page 848: Entering Or Selecting Service Modes
Chapter 17 Copier service mode COPIER FEEDER ADF service mode Only if installed. SORTER Finisher service mode Only if installed. BOARD Accessory board service mode Only if installed. F-17-7 17.1.5 Entering or selecting service modes 0008-7887 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 To execute a copier operation using a service mode, remove the cable from the external controller or the cable from the network before entering the desired mode.
Page 849: Exiting Service Modes
Chapter 17 Main body service modes COPIER SORTER Sorter/finisher service modes Displayed only when the finisher is attached. (There are no modes for the sorter, isn’t displayed even SORTER when the sorter is attached.) BOARD Option board service modes Displayed only when an option board is attached.
Page 850: Backing Up Service Mode
Chapter 17 Service Sheet F-17-10 17.1.10 Backing Up Service Mode 0008-9151 iR85+ At time of shipment from the factory, each machine is adjusted, and the adjustment values are recorded on the Service Label (attached to the cover of the Service Book case behind the front cover). If you have replaced the DC controller PCB (or if you have cleared the RAM of these), the ADJUST and OPTION settings will be replaced by default settings.
Page 851: Initial Screen
Chapter 17 SERVICE MODE COPIER Initial items FEEDER Press an item to select. SORTER BOARD F-17-12 17.1.12 Initial screen 0008-7889 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR8070 COPIER Initial items FEEDER Touch an item to select it. SORTER BOARD F-17-13 17.1.13 Initial screen 0009-1481 iR85+ 17-7...
Page 852: Level 1/2 Screen(Ir105)
Chapter 17 COPIER Initial items Touch an item to select it. SORTER BOARD F-17-14 17.1.14 Level 1/2 Screen(iR105) 0007-0327 iR105 Level 1 item Press an item to VERSION select. USER DPOT ACC-STS ANALOG Level 2 item CST-STS SENSOR Press an item to MISC select.
Page 853: Level 3 Screen(Ir105)
Chapter 17 Display Adjust Function Option Test Counter Main items Touch an item to VERSION select it. USER ACC-STS ANALOG Intermediate items CST-STS Touch an item to select it. F-17-16 17.1.16 Level 3 Screen(iR105) 0007-0328 iR105 Page <VERSION> < 1/2 > <...
Page 854: Sub-Item Screen
Chapter 17 <ADJ-XY> < 1/1 > < READY > (yyyyy) {aaaaa~bbbbb} xxxxx ADJ-X Input range Press an item to Value before change highlight. Input value ADJ-X To accept input To switch between + and - Stop key: press to stop ongoing operation. Clear key: press to clear a value.
Page 855 Chapter 17 Display Adjust Function Option Test Counter <ADJ-XY> < 1/3 > < READY > ADJ-X ← (yyyyy) {aaaaa to bbbbb} xxxxx Range of values that Pressing an item displays Value before change can be entered it in reverse. Entered value ADJ-X PREV NEXT...
Page 856: Display (Status Display Mode)
Chapter 17 17.2 DISPLAY (Status Display Mode) 17.2.1 COPIER 17.2.1.1 Copier List 0008-4863 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 <VERSION> T-17-1 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION Sub-item Description Level ROM version of each circuit board Marking style<R-CON XX.YY> XX : Version number ,YY : Development control number - <--.-->...
Page 857 Chapter 17 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION Sub-item Description Level LANG-TK Version of the Turkish language file <ACC-STS> T-17-2 COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS Sub-item Description Level FEEDER DADF connection status 0: Not connected 1: Connected SORTER Finisher and punch unit connection status Sorter type 0: None 1: Finisher 2: Saddle finisher Punch type 0: None 1: 2 holes 2: 2/3 holes 3: 4 holes (fr) 4: 4 holes (sw) DECK...
Page 858 Chapter 17 T-17-4 COPIER > DISPLAY > CST-STS Sub-item Description Level WIDTH-C3 Indicates the paper width of the cassette 3 in terms of paper size. WIDTH-C4 Indicates the paper width of the cassette 4 in terms of paper size. WIDTH-MF Indicates the paper width of the manual feeder in terms of paper size.
Page 859 Chapter 17 F-17-22 <No.> Error sequential number: 1 to 50 (The oldest error has the greatest number.) <DATE> Error occurrence date <TIME1> Error occurrence time <TIME2> Error reset time <CODE> Error code <DTL> Error detail code (0000 for none) <1> Error location 0: Main controller 1: DADF 2: Finisher 3: Not used 4: Reader unit 5: Printer unit 6: Various PDL board <P>...
Page 860: Copier List
Chapter 17 <MISC> T-17-8 COPIER > DISPLAY > MISC Sub-item Description Level FL-LIFE indicates the duty of the fluorescence lamp. <ALARM-2> F-17-23 <No.> Alarm sequential number: 1 to 50 (The oldest alarm has the greatest number.) <DATE> Alarm occurrence date <TIME1>...
Page 861 Chapter 17 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION Sub-item Description Level BOOTROM Boot ROM version of the main controller circuit board Marking style: xx.yy_z z indicates the boot ROM type. FN-SLAVE ROM version of the finisher controller circuit board (SlaveCPU) LANG-CS Version of the Czech language file LANG-DA Version of the Danish language file...
Page 862 Chapter 17 COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS Sub-item Description Level PDL-FNC1/2 Valid PDL 0000 0000 0000 0000 to 1111 1111 1111 1111 (0:OFF,1:ON) b31 to b16 for PDL-FNC1 b15 to b0 for PDL-FNC2 b31: BDL, b30: PS, b29: PCL, b28: PDF, b27: LIPS, b26: N201, b25: I5577, b24: ESC/P, b23: HPGL, b22: HPGL2, b21: IMAGING, b20: KS, b19 to b0: Reserved Model name of the hard disk drive PCI1/2/3...
Page 863 Chapter 17 F-17-24 Touch an arbitrary jam display screen to see details about the jam. (1) To previous page (2) To next page (3) Jam sequential number (4) Jam type (5) Corresponding sensor (6) To next jam screen (7) To previous jam screen <No.>...
Page 864 Chapter 17 <DATE> Error occurrence date <TIME1> Error occurrence time <TIME2> Error reset time <CODE> Error code <DTL> Error detail code (0000 for none) <1> Error location 0: Main controller 1: DADF 2: Finisher 3: Not used 4: Reader unit 5: Printer unit 6: Various PDL board <P>...
Page 865: Copier List
Chapter 17 <DTL> Alarm detail code <CNTR> Total counter value at alarm occurrence 17.2.1.3 Copier List 0008-7771 iR85+ <VERSION> T-17-16 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION Sub-item Description Level ROM version of each circuit board Marking style<R-CON XX.YY> XX : Version number ,YY : Development control number - <--.-->...
Page 866 Chapter 17 T-17-17 COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS Sub-item Description Level SORTER Finisher and punch unit connection status Sorter type 0: None 1: Finisher 2: Saddle finisher Punch type 0: None 1: 2 holes 2: 2/3 holes 3: 4 holes (fr) 4: 4 holes (sw) DECK Paper deck connection status 0: not connected...
Page 867 Chapter 17 F-17-27 Touch an arbitrary jam display screen to see details about the jam. (1) To previous page (2) To next page (3) Jam sequential number (4) Jam type (5) Corresponding sensor (6) To next jam screen (7) To previous jam screen <No.>...
Page 868: Copier List
Chapter 17 <DATE> Error occurrence date <TIME1> Error occurrence time <TIME2> Error reset time <CODE> Error code <DTL> Error detail code (0000 for none) <1> Error location 0: Main controller 2: Finisher 3: Not used 5: Printer unit 6: Various PDL board <P>...
Page 869 Chapter 17 T-17-22 COPIER > DISPLAY > VERSION Sub-item Description Level ROM version of each circuit board Marking style<R-CON XX.YY> XX : Version number ,YY : Development control number - <--.--> if no circuit boards are connected. DC-CON ROM version of the DC controller circuit board R-CON ROM version of the reader controller circuit board PANEL...
Page 870 Chapter 17 COPIER > DISPLAY > ACC-STS Sub-item Description Level SORTER Finisher and punch unit connection status Sorter type 0: None 1: Finisher 2: Saddle finisher Punch type 0: None 1: 2 holes 2: 2/3 holes 3: 4 holes (fr) 4: 4 holes (sw) DECK Paper deck connection status 0: not connected 1:connected (small)
Page 871 Chapter 17 F-17-30 Touch an arbitrary jam display screen to see details about the jam. (1) To previous page (2) To next page (3) Jam sequential number (4) Jam type (5) Corresponding sensor (6) To next jam screen (7) To previous jam screen <No.>...
Page 872 Chapter 17 <DATE> Error occurrence date <TIME1> Error occurrence time <TIME2> Error reset time <CODE> Error code <DTL> Error detail code (0000 for none) <1> Error location 0: Main controller 1: DADF 2: Finisher 3: Not used 4: Reader unit 5: Printer unit 6: Various PDL board <P>...
Page 873: Feeder
Chapter 17 <ALARM-2> F-17-32 <No.> Alarm sequential number: 1 to 50 (The oldest alarm has the greatest number.) <DATE> Alarm occurrence date <TIME1> Alarm occurrence time <TIME2> Alarm reset time <CODE> Alarm location code and alarm code <DTL> Alarm detail code <CNTR>...
Page 874: I/O (I/O Display Mode)
Chapter 17 17.3 I/O (I/O Display Mode) 17.3.1 Overview 0007-0651 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 / iR85+ / iR8070 The following shows the Input/Output screen (COPIER> I/O): DC-CON I/O port of the DC controller PCB. R-CON I/O port of the Reader controller PCB. I/O port of the ADF controller PCB.
Page 875: Dc-Con
Chapter 17 17.3.3 DC-CON 0007-0654 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 T-17-33 Address Description Notation Remarks P001 laser motor cooling fan stop detection signal 1: stop fixing heat discharge fan stop detection signal 1: stop laser scanner fan stop detection signal 1: stop laser drive cooling fan stop detection signal 1: stop curl-reducing fan stop detection signal...
Page 876 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P004 right deck lifter sensor PS21 1: paper present left deck lifter sensor PS31 1: paper present cassette 3 lifter sensor PS38 1: paper present cassette 4 lifter sensor PS43 1: paper present right deck paper level middle sensor PS51 1: paper present right deck paper level high sensor...
Page 877 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P007 primary charging wire cleaner drive 1: move to rear primary charging wire cleaner drive 1: move to front pre-transfer charging wire cleaner drive 1: move to front pre-transfer charging wire cleaner drive 1: move to rear transfer/separation charging wire cleaner drive 1: move to rear transfer/separation charging wire cleaner drive...
Page 878 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P010 right deck pickup sensor PS20 1: paper present left deck pickup sensor PS25 1: paper present cassette 3 pickup sensor PS37 1: paper present cassette 4 pickup sensor PS42 1: paper present vertical path 1 paper sensor PS47 1: paper present vertical path 2 paper sensor...
Page 879 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P016 not used pre-exposure lamp LED1 1: ON potential sensor PCB19 1: ON HVT DC component 0: high-voltage output HVT developing AC component 0: ON HVT pre-transfer AC/separation AC component 0: ON paper feed guide bias PCB11 0: ON paper feed guide bias switch-over...
Page 880 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P023 not used not used right deck lifter PS21 0:paper present 1:paper absent left deck lifter PS31 0:paper present 1:paper absent cassette 3 lifter PS38 0:paper present 1:paper absent cassette 4 lifter PS43 0:paper present 1:paper absent not used not used...
Page 881: Dc-Con
Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P028 not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used P029 not used not used not used...
Page 882 Chapter 17 T-17-34 Address Description Notation Remarks P001 right deck pickup sensor PS20 1: paper present left deck pickup sensor PS25 1: paper present cassette 3 pickup sensor PS37 1: paper present cassette 4 pickup sensor PS42 1: paper present vertical path 1 paper sensor PS47 1: paper present...
Page 883 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P004 right deck lifter sensor PS21 1: paper present left deck lifter sensor PS31 1: paper present cassette 3 lifter sensor PS38 1: paper present cassette 4 lifter sensor PS43 1: paper present right deck paper level middle sensor PS51 1: paper present right deck paper level high sensor...
Page 884 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P007 primary charging assembly fan stop detection signal FM1 1: stop fixing heat discharge fan stop detection signal 1: stop laser scanner fan stop detection signal 1: stop laser driver cooling fan stop detection signal 1: stop de-curling fan stop detection signal 1: stop...
Page 885 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P011 drum motor drive 0: ON main motor drive 0: ON pickup motor drive 0: ON fixing motor drive 0: ON laser scanner motor drive 1: ON cartridge motor drive 1: ON hopper motor drive 0: ON laser scanner motor switch 0: high speed...
Page 886 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P018 waste toner full detection reset 0: reset shut-off 1: shut-off not used P019 deck open indication LED100 1: ON deck pickup solenoid 1: ON deck feed clutch CL101 1: ON deck pickup clutch CL102 1: ON deck main motor speed switch signal...
Page 887: R-Con
Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P022 not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used P023 not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used not used...
Page 888: R-Con
Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P003 original orientation detection PCB power detection 0: connected original orientation detection PCB busy detection 0: busy original orientation detection PCB error detection 0: error not used not used not used not used CCD/AP type detection P004 inverter fan full speed 1: ON (24 V)
Page 889 Chapter 17 T-17-36 Address Description Notation Remarks P001 scanner motor clock signal when 1->0, ON scanner motor CCW/CW switch signal 0: CCW, 1: CW scanner motor HOLD/OFF switch signal 0: current hold, 1: current OFF scanner motor driver reset signal 1: reset scanner motor stream reading current switch signal 0: stream reading...
Page 890: Feeder
Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P007 WATCH-DOG pulse output normal clock output to analog processor when 0 ->1 ->0, data transmitted DO signal from EEPROM Data area not used not used not used not used not used P008 not used not used not used not used...
Page 891 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P002 not used not used not used not used pickup roller home position 1: HP pickup roller height sensor 2 1: original present pickup roller height sensor 1 1: original present pre-reversal sensor 1: original present P003 not used original detection sensor LED...
Page 892 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P008 image leading edge signal 1: leading edge pre-registration roller paper sensor 0: original present separation motor reference clock during outputs, repeats '0' and '1' delivery motor clock detection PI11 during outputs, repeats '0' and '1' pickup motor phase A during outputs, repeats '0' and '1'...
Page 893: Feeder
Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P029 reversal sensor adjustment P030 manual feed registration sensor adjustment P031 pre-cycle end sensor adjustment P032 separation motor 17.3.8 FEEDER 0008-9074 / iR8070 The indication will be '0' while the machine is in operation (reading an original). T-17-38 Address Description...
Page 894 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P006 EEPROM data input cooling fan lock signal 1: locked cooling fan not used post-separation sensor signal (IRQ0) registration 1 sensor signal (IRQ1) read sensor signal (IRQ2) delivery reversal sensor signal (IRQ3) P007 not used not used not used not used...
Page 895: Sorter
Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P020 pickup motor (hereafter, analog ports) P021 feed motor P022 delivery reversal motor P023 post-separation sensor_DA P024 post-separation sensor_TH P025 read sensor DA P026 read sensor TH P027 delivery reversal sensor_DA P028 delivery reversal sensor_TH P029 not used P030...
Page 896 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P004 tray A paper detection PI20 1: paper present puncher identification 1 puncher identification 2 lower path paper sensor 1: paper present delivery sensor PI32 1: paper present upper path paper sensor 1: paper present inlet path paper sensor 1: paper present buffer path paper sensor...
Page 897 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P010 staple absent detection 1: staple absent, 0: staple present READY detection 1: NO, 0: ready stack tray approach detection 0: ON door 24V down detection 1: down feed path paper detection 1 PI76 1: paper present feed path paper detection 2 1: paper present...
Page 898 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P017 inserter separation detection 1 PI62 1: paper present, 0: paper absent inserter separation detection 2 PI63 1: paper prevent, 0: paper absent inserter feed detection 3 PI61 1: paper prevent, 0: paper absent tray B paper detection PI17 1: paper prevent, 0:...
Page 899 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P023 fold feed motor ON 1: ON folder inlet solenoid ON 1: ON decompression solenoid ON 1: ON B4 fold No. 2 stopper solenoid ON SL72 1: ON locking solenoid ON 1: ON B4 fold No. 1 stopper solenoid ON SL75 1: ON fold path residual paper detection 2...
Page 900 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P030 D/A serial output flash serial output punch motor ON 1: OFF, 0: ON flash serial input D/A serial lock not used not used not used P031 stapler shift motor ON* 1: retain, 0: drive D/A load signal stapler shift motor A stapler shift more B...
Page 901 Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P037 paper positioning plate home position detection PI49 0: HP not used inlet cover open detection connector connection PI51 0: connected vertical path detection PI57 0: paper absent 1: paper present feed roller phase detection PI53 1: flag present not used...
Page 902: Mn-Con(Ir105)
Chapter 17 Address Description Notation Remarks P044 DIPSW1 Bit 8(saddle switcher PCB SW1) 0: ON DISPW1 Bit 7(saddle switcher PCB SW1) 0: ON DIPSW1 Bit 6(saddle switcher PCB SW1) 0: ON DIPSW1 Bit 5(saddle switcher PCB SW1) 0: ON DIPSW1 Bit 4(saddle switcher PCB SW1) 0: ON DIPSW1 Bit 3(saddle switcher PCB SW1) 0: ON...
Page 903 Chapter 17 Addres Description Notation Remarks P003 DDI-P general-purpose input not used DDI-P general-purpose input not used DDI-P general-purpose input not used PSCNTST signal (scanner start-up 0: reader start signal) P004 DDI-S general-purpose output not used DDI-S general-purpose output not used 3.3 V emergency power-off signal 0: normal (ON), 1= 5W (OFF) sleep mode...
Page 904: Adjust (Adjustment Mode)
Chapter 17 17.4 ADJUST (Adjustment Mode) 17.4.1 COPIER 17.4.1.1 Copier List 0008-4932 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 <LAMP> T-17-41 COPIER > ADJUST > LAMP Sub-item Description Level L-DATA Use it to enter the scanning lamp intensity data. <Setting range> 0 to 1023 - A higher input value increases the intensity.
Page 905 Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY Sub-item Description Level ADJ-X Adjusting the optical image head position (image read start position in the subscan direction) <Setting range> 0 to 2970 Increasing the value by 1 shifts the image read start position 0.1 mm backward. Horizontal size plate Copyboard glass Standard...
Page 906 Chapter 17 T-17-44 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD Sub-item Description Level Making CCD- and Shading-Related Adjustments If faulty images are noted after executing COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ, enter the settings indicated on the service label. SH-TRGT Use it to enter the white level target value for shading correction. 1 to 2043 [at time of shipment/after RAM initialization:900] GAIN-E-R Use it to enter the gain value for the last half even-numbered pixels of the CCD.
Page 907 Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD Sub-item Description Level Making CCD- and Shading-Related Adjustments If faulty images are noted after executing COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ, enter the settings indicated on the service label. LUT-O-F5 Use it to enter the link correction data value for the first half odd-numbered pixels of the CCD.
Page 908 Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP Sub-item Description Level HVT-DE Use it to enter the offset value for the developing high-voltage output of the high- voltage unit. <Setting range> -50 to 50 If you have replaced the high-voltage unit, be sure to enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new high-voltage unit.
Page 909 Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK Sub-item Description Level BLANK-TE Use it to enter a value of the non-image width in image main scanning direction (left, right). <Setting range> 10 to 50 (unit: 0.1 mm), default: 25 If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
Page 910 Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR Sub-item Description Level PRE-TR Use it to enter an output adjustment value for the pre-transfer charging. <Setting range> 0 to 300 If you have replaced the DC controller PCB or cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, be sure to enter the value indicated on the service sheet.
Page 911 Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-SP Sub-item Description Level HVT-SP Use it to enter an offset value for the separation high-voltage output of the high- voltage unit. <Setting range> -100 to 100 If you have replaced the high-voltage unit, be sure to enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new high-voltage unit.
Page 912: Copier List
Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ Sub-item Description Level Making Cassette-/Manual Feed-Related Adjustments If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the service label. MF-A6R Use it to enter a paper width basic value for the manual feed tray. (A6R) <Setting range>...
Page 913 Chapter 17 <ADJ-XY> T-17-57 COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY Sub-item Description Level Adjusting the mage read start position - If RAM on the reader controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
Page 914 Chapter 17 <CCD> T-17-58 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD Sub-item Description Level Making CCD- and Shading-Related Adjustments If faulty images are noted after executing COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ, enter the settings indicated on the service label. SH-TRGT Use it to enter the white level target value for shading correction. 130 to SH-RATIO Use it to enter the data on the white level ratio (standard white paper and standard white plate) for shading correction.
Page 915 Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP Sub-item Description Level HVT-DE Use it to enter the offset value for the developing high-voltage output of the high- voltage unit. <Setting range> -50 to 50 If you have replaced the high-voltage unit, be sure to enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new high-voltage unit.
Page 916 Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK Sub-item Description Level BLANK-TE Use it to enter a value of the non-image width in image main scanning direction (left, right). <Setting range> 10 to 50 (unit: 0.1 mm), default: 25 If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
Page 917 Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR Sub-item Description Level PRE-TR Use it to enter an output adjustment value for the pre-transfer charging. <Setting range> 0 to 300 If you have replaced the DC controller PCB or cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, be sure to enter the value indicated on the service sheet.
Page 918 Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-SP Sub-item Description Level HVT-SP Use it to enter an offset value for the separation high-voltage output of the high- voltage unit. <Setting range> -100 to 100 If you have replaced the high-voltage unit, be sure to enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new high-voltage unit.
Page 919: Copier List
Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ Sub-item Description Level Making Cassette-/Manual Feed-Related Adjustments If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the service label. MF-A6R Use it to enter a paper width basic value for the manual feed tray. (A6R) <Setting range>...
Page 920 Chapter 17 <DEVELOP> T-17-71 COPIER > ADJUST > DEVELOP Sub-item Description Level DE-DC Use it to enter the DC output value for image formation. <Setting range> 0 to 600 There are cases that the actual input and the indication after input do not match. DE-NO-DC Use it to enter the development DC output value for non-image formation.
Page 921 Chapter 17 T-17-73 COPIER > ADJUST > BLANK Sub-item Description Level BLANK-T Use it to enter a value for the image leading edge non-image width. <Setting range> 0 to 2362 (Default: 0) Setting a greater value increases the chipping width. If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced, enter the value from the service label.
Page 922 Chapter 17 T-17-76 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR Sub-item Description Level TR-N1 Use it to enter an output adjustment value for the transfer charging current (for printing on a single-sided print or on the 1st side of a double-sided print using plain paper). <Setting range>...
Page 923 Chapter 17 T-17-77 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-SP Sub-item Description Level SP-N1 Use it to enter an output adjustment value for the separation charging current (for printing on a single-side print or on the 1st side of a double-sided print using plain paper).
Page 924: Copier List
Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > CST-ADJ Sub-item Description Level Making Cassette-/Manual Feed-Related Adjustments If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, enter the settings indicated on the service label. C4-STMTR Use it to enter a paper width basic value for the cassette 4. (STMTR) <Setting range>...
Page 925 Chapter 17 T-17-82 COPIER > ADJUST > AE Sub-item Description Level AE-TBL Adjusting the character density at image density adjustment <Setting range> 1 to 9 (Default: 5) Setting a greater value makes characters darker. Setting a smaller value makes characters lighter. If RAM on the reader controller circuit board has been cleared, enter the value from the service label.
Page 926 Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > ADJ-XY Sub-item Description Level ADJ-S Adjusting the optical shading measuring position <Setting range> 0 to 4 Increasing the value by 1 shifts the shading measuring position 0.1 mm forward. HP sensor Vertical size plate Copyboard glass Standard white plate Lower value...
Page 927 Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > CCD Sub-item Description Level Making CCD- and Shading-Related Adjustments If faulty images are noted after executing COPIER>FUNCTION>CCD>CCD-ADJ, enter the settings indicated on the service label. LUT-O-R3 Use it to enter the link correction data value for the last half odd-numbered pixels of the CCD.
Page 928 Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > LASER Sub-item Description Level Adjusting the Laser Output If you have cleared the RAM on the DC controller PCB, be sure to enter the settings indicated on the service label. LA-DELAY Entering a delay value after laser unit displacement (Matching the laser main scan) <Setting range>...
Page 929 Chapter 17 T-17-87 COPIER > ADJUST > DENS Sub-item Description Level DENS-ADJ Correcting the image (copy/print) density The F-value table is corrected if an image becomes fogged or blurred. <Setting range> 1 to 9 (Default: 5) Setting a greater value reduces fogging. Setting a smaller value reduces blurring.
Page 930 Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > V-CONT Sub-item Description Level If RAM on the DC controller circuit board has been cleared or the board itself has been replaced, enter the value from the service label. VD-OFST Use it to enter an offset value for the voltage potential control dark-area target voltage potential.
Page 931 Chapter 17 COPIER > ADJUST > HV-TR Sub-item Description Level H-PRE-TR Use it to enter an offset value for the pre-transfer high-voltage output of the high- voltage unit. <Setting range> -100 to 100 If you have replaced the high-voltage unit, be sure to enter the value indicated on the label attached to the new high-Voltage unit.
Page 932 Chapter 17 T-17-93 COPIER > ADJUST > FEED-ADJ Sub-item Description Level REGIST Use it to adjust the timing at which the registration roller clutch goes ON. <Setting range> -100 to 100 (unit: 0.1 mm) MEMO: A higher value delays the timing at which the registration roller clutch goes ON, thus decreasing the leading edge margin.
Page 933: Feeder
Chapter 17 <EXP-LED> T-17-95 COPIER > ADJUST > EXP-LED Sub-item Description Level PRE-TR Use it to enter the output adjustment value for the pre-transfer exposure lamp. <Setting range> 20 to 80 17.4.2 FEEDER 17.4.2.1 Feeder List 0008-4949 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 FEEDER >ADJUST T-17-96 FEEDER >ADJUST...
Page 934: Feeder List
Chapter 17 FEEDER >ADJUST Sub-item Description Level STRD-S Use it to adjust the scanner stop position for stream reading mode (smallsize). Make image position changed on the sheet <Setting range> -25 to 25 (unit: 0.1 mm) Stream reading scanner stop position Lower value Higher value...
Page 935: Feeder List
Chapter 17 DOCST Use it to adjust the original stop position when the ADF is used (original tray pickup). <Setting range> -10 to 10 (unit: 0.5 mm) MEMO: - A higher value decreases the leading edge margin. - The data is retained by the ADF controller PCB. <Using the Mode>...
Page 936: Sorter
Chapter 17 STRD-S Use it to adjust the scanner stop position for stream reading mode (smallsize). <Setting range> -25 to 25 (unit: 0.1 mm) Stream reading scanner stop position Higher value Lower value Copyboard glass STRD-L Use it to adjust the scanner stop position for stream reading mode (largesize). <Setting range>...
Page 937: Sorter List
Chapter 17 PNCH-HLE Use it to adjust the punch hole position (paper feed direction) when the puncher unit is used. <Setting range> -23 to 23 (unit: about 0.5 mm) <Using the Mode> 1) Make a print of the Test Chart, and check the position of the holes. 2) Select the item, and change the setting to adjust.
Page 938 Chapter 17 Sub-item Description Level PNCH-HLE Use it to adjust the punch hole position (paper feed direction) when the puncher unit is used. <Setting range> -23 to 23 (unit: about 0.5 mm) <Using the Mode> 1) Make a print of the Test Chart, and check the position of the holes. 2) Select the item, and change the setting to adjust.
Page 939: Function (Operation/Inspection Mode)
Chapter 17 17.5 FUNCTION (Operation/Inspection Mode) 17.5.1 COPIER 17.5.1.1 Copier List 0008-4952 iR105i/iR105+ / iR9070 <INSTALL> T-17-103 COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL Sub-item Description Level TONER-S Stirring toner in the developer at installation <Operating procedure> 1. Select an item to reverse its display. 2.
Page 940 Chapter 17 T-17-104 COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD Sub-item Description Level CCD-ADJ Automatically adjusting CCD <Operating procedure> 1) Place about 10 or more sheets of standard white paper (whitest paper used by the user, excluding color print paper) on the document table. 2) Select <CCD-ADJ>...
Page 941 Chapter 17 T-17-105 COPIER > FUNCTION > LASER Sub-item Description Level POWER-A Use it to turn on the laser A. <Using the Mode> 1) Select <POWER-A> to highlight, and press the OK key. 2) See that the laser goes ON, and the display indicates 'Start -> ACTIVE' (flashing); the upper right of the screen indicates <SERVICE>.
Page 942 Chapter 17 T-17-108 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEANING Sub-item Description Level WIRE-CLN Use it to execute auto cleaning of the charging wire 5 tines continuously (round trip). If you have replaced the primary charging wire or the transfer charg-ing wire, be sure to execute this mode. <Using the Mode>...
Page 943 Chapter 17 COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL Sub-item Description Level TOUCHCHK Adjusting the coordinate positions on the analog touchpanel <Operating procedure> - Align the press positions on the touchpanel and the coordinate positions on the LCD section. - If the LCD section has been replaced, execute this service mode. 1) Select TOUCHCHK to reverse its display.
Page 944 Chapter 17 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK Sub-item Description Level SL-ON Starting the solenoid operation check <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item and press the OK key to repeat ON and OFF in the following pattern: 0.5-second ON -> 5-second OFF -> 0.5-second ON -> 5-second OFF -> 0.5- second ON ->...
Page 945 Chapter 17 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR Sub-item Description Level DC-CON Clearing RAM on the DC controller circuit board The RAM is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and ON. <Operating procedure> 1) Select COPIER>FUNCTION>MISC-P>P-PRINT to print out the contents of the service mode.
Page 946 Chapter 17 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR Sub-item Description Level SND-STUP Clearing the send-read settings The send-read settings are cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item and press the OK key. 2) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.
Page 947: Copier List
Chapter 17 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P Sub-item Description Level P-TR-EXP Use it to check the activation of the pre-transfer exposure lamp. <Using the Mode> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. - The pre-transfer exposure lamp goes ON. 2) See that the pre-transfer exposure lamp remains ON for several seconds and go OFF automatically.
Page 948 Chapter 17 T-17-121 COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL Sub-item Description Level TONER-S Stirring toner in the developer at installation <Operating procedure> 1. Select an item to reverse its display. 2. "Check the Developer" is displayed. Check that the developer connector is connected. 3.
Page 949 Chapter 17 COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD Sub-item Description Level SHDG-POS Use it to enter data for changing the position of measurement on the standard white plate used for shading correction. <Setting range> 216 to 296 (a multiple of 8 causes a shift of about 0.189 mm) - If dirt is found on the copyboard glass, execute this mode to avoid the area when reading the standard white plate.
Page 950 Chapter 17 T-17-124 COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC Sub-item Description Level OFST Use it to execute offset adjustment of the potential sensor. This mode is part of the procedure to be performed when replacing the potential sensor unit; do not execute it on its own. <Using the Mode>...
Page 951 Chapter 17 T-17-127 COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING Sub-item Description Level NIP-CHK Use it to generate output for measuring the fixing nip width. <Using the Item> 1) Make about 20 A4 prints using the test sheet. 2) Place A4 paper in the tray. 3) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key.
Page 952 Chapter 17 Screen Display Start START Clear CLEAR Help Counter Check BILL <PART-CHK> T-17-130 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK Sub-item Description Level Specifying a clutch to check its operation (Range: 1 to 21) <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item. 2) Enter the code of the clutch from the ten-key pad. 3) Press the OK key.
Page 953 Chapter 17 T-17-132 Code Name Code Name Drum motor (M0) Horizontal registration motor (M15) Main motor (M1) Duplex reversal motor (M11) Pickup motor (M2) duplex feed motor (M12) Fixing motor (M3) deck main motor (M101) Laser scanner motor (M4) Inside cartridge toner feed motor (M6) Inside hopper toner feed motor (M18) T-17-133 Code...
Page 954 Chapter 17 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR Sub-item Description Level CNT-MCON Clearing the service counter incremented by the main controller circuit board The password is cleared when the OK key is pressed. <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item and press the OK key. CNT-DCON Clearing a service counter incremented by the DC controller circuit board The password is cleared when the OK key is pressed.
Page 955 Chapter 17 T-17-136 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P Sub-item Description Level P-PRINT Printing out the service mode settings <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item. 2) Press the OK key to start printing. USER-PRT Printing out the user mode list <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item.
Page 956: Copier List
Chapter 17 COPIER > FUNCTION > SYSTEM Sub-item Description Level HD-CHECK Checking and restoring the partition specified by CHK-TYPE <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item. 2) Press the OK key. 3) The result (1:OK, 2:NG (hardware), 3:NG (software) restored/alternative sector) is displayed.
Page 957 Chapter 17 T-17-140 COPIER > FUNCTION > DPC Sub-item Description Level OFST Use it to execute offset adjustment of the potential sensor. This mode is part of the procedure to be performed when replacing the potential sensor unit; do not execute it on its own. <Using the Mode>...
Page 958 Chapter 17 T-17-143 COPIER > FUNCTION > FIXING Sub-item Description Level NIP-CHK Use it to generate output for measuring the fixing nip width. <Using the Item> 1) Make about 20 A4 prints using the test sheet. 2) Place A4 paper in the tray. 3) Select the item to highlight, and press the OK key.
Page 959 Chapter 17 Screen Display Start START Clear CLEAR Help Counter Check BILL <PART-CHK> T-17-146 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK Sub-item Description Level Specifying a clutch to check its operation (Range: 1 to 21) <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item. 2) Enter the code of the clutch from the ten-key pad. 3) Press the OK key.
Page 960 Chapter 17 T-17-148 Code Name Code Name Drum motor (M0) Horizontal registration motor (M15) Main motor (M1) Duplex reversal motor (M11) Pickup motor (M2) duplex feed motor (M12) Fixing motor (M3) deck main motor (M101) Laser scanner motor (M4) Inside cartridge toner feed motor (M6) Inside hopper toner feed motor (M18) T-17-149 Code...
Page 961 Chapter 17 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR Sub-item Description Level Clearing the following settings in User mode - Backup data (user-defined values) of common settings - Various backup data (user-defined values), excluding fax The settings are cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and ON. <Operating procedure>...
Page 962: Copier List
Chapter 17 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P Sub-item Description Level HIST-PRT Printing out the jam history and error history <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item. 2) Press the OK key to start printing. TRS-DATA Transferring memory received data to the box <Operating procedure>...
Page 963 Chapter 17 T-17-153 COPIER > FUNCTION > INSTALL Sub-item Description Level TONER-S Stirring toner in the developer at installation <Operating procedure> 1. Select an item to reverse its display. 2. "Check the Developer" is displayed. Check that the developer connector is connected. 3.
Page 964 Chapter 17 COPIER > FUNCTION > CCD Sub-item Description Level LUT-ADJ2 Use it to execute CCD gain detail correction. - If the density is not corrected using LUT-ADJ (CCD gain simplified correction), execute this mode using the 10-gradation chart. <Using the Mode> 1) As shown, place the 10-gradation chart (D-10 Test Sheet) on the copyboard glass.
Page 965 Chapter 17 COPIER > FUNCTION > CST Sub-item Description Level C3-STMTR Use it to register a paper width basic value for the cassette 3/4. C3-A4R STMTR width: 139.5 mm, A4R width: 210 mm C4-STMTR To make find adjustments after registering the basic value, execute C4-A4R the following: ADJUST>CST-ADJ>C3-STMTR, C3-A4R, C4-STMTR, C4- A4R.
Page 966 Chapter 17 T-17-160 COPIER > FUNCTION > PANEL Sub-item Description Level LCD-CHK Checking the LCD display for missing dots <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item and press the OK key to start operation. The front of the panel lights repeatedly in order of white, black, red, green, and blue. (Check this lighting.) 2) Press the Stop key to terminate the operation.
Page 967 Chapter 17 COPIER > FUNCTION > PART-CHK Sub-item Description Level Specifying a motor to check its operation (Range: 1 to 11) <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item. 2) Enter the code of the motor from the ten-key pad. 3) Press the OK key. 4) Press MTR-ON to check its operation.
Page 968 Chapter 17 <CLEAR> T-17-166 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR Sub-item Description Level Clearing an error code (Object error code: E000/E001/E002/E003) <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item and press the OK key. 2) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON. DC-CON Clearing RAM on the DC controller circuit board The RAM is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and ON.
Page 969 Chapter 17 COPIER > FUNCTION > CLEAR Sub-item Description Level CARD Clearing the card ID (department) related data The card ID related data is cleared when the main power switch is turned OFF and <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item and press the OK key. 2) Turn the main power switch OFF and ON.
Page 970: Feeder
Chapter 17 COPIER > FUNCTION > MISC-P Sub-item Description Level KEY-HIST Printing out the operating section key input history <Operating procedure> 1) Select this item. 2) Press the OK key to start printing. HIST-PRT Printing out the jam history and error history <Operating procedure>...
Page 971: Feeder List
Chapter 17 T-17-170 FEEDER >FUNCTION Sub-item Description Level SENS-INT Use it to adjust the sensitivity of each sensor of the ADF. Be sure to clean the sensor first. <Using the Mode> 1) Select the item, and press the OK key. 2) Set that the machine stops automatically after adjustment.
Page 972: Option (Machine Settings Mode)
Selecting several types of firmware installed on the hard disk and switching the country, language, and paper size type of this machine <Adjustment method> XXYYZZAAXX: Country (UP), YY: Language (ja), ZZ (00) Destination (00:CANON 01:OEM), AA (00): Paper size type (00:AB 01:Inch 02:A 03:All size) <Operating procedure> 1) Select <CONFIG>.
Page 973 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level TR-SP-C2 Use it to set the transfer/separation output setting when the left deck is used, thereby preventing faults otherwise occurring. <Setting value> 0: setting for plain paper (default) 1: setting for recycled paper 2: setting for tracing paper TR-SP-C3 Use it to set the transfer/separation output setting when the cassette 3 is used,...
Page 974 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level OHP-CNT Use it to turn ON/OFF the potential control mechanism for transparency mode. <Setting value> 0: use target value obtained in potential control of transparency mode (default) 1: do not use potential control in transparency mode FIX-TMP1 Use it to select a temperature for starting down-sequence for plain paper.
Page 975 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level COTDPC-D Use it to set toner save mode. <Setting value> 0: do not use toner save mode (default) 1: VDT-20V of coy image, VDT-P25V of print image (target of -10 %, approx.) 2: VDT-40V of copy image, VDT-P-50V of print image (target of -20 %, approx.)
Page 976 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level BK-BD-6 Use it to set black band monthly remedial mode (for June). <Setting value> Same as for January. BK-BD-7 Use it to set black band monthly remedial mode (for July). <Setting value>...
Page 977 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level UI-SEND Setting whether or not to display the send screen of the operating section <Setting value> 0: Do not display 1: Display [Default] UI-FAX Setting whether or not to display the fax screen of the operating section not used UI-EXT Setting whether or not to display the extended screen of the operating section...
Page 978 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level SVMD-ENT Switching how to enter service mode <Setting value> 0: [User mode key] -> Simultaneous press of [2] and [*]-> [User mode] (Default) 1: [User mode key] -> Simultaneous press of [4] and [9]-> [User mode] DA-CNCT Reserved for future CHNG-STS...
Page 979 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level B4-L-CNT Setting whether to count B4 as the large size or the small size on Software counters 1 to 6 <Setting value> 0: Small size [Default] 1: Large size COPY-JOB Prohibiting copy job reservation when a card reader and a coin robot are used <Setting value>...
Page 980 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level DATE-DSP Switching the date display format <Setting value> 0: YYMM/DD 1: DD/MM/YY 2: MM/DD/YY MB-CCV Limiting the mailbox control card user <Setting value> 0: No [Default] 1: Yes PR-D-SEL Use it to set the density of printing (PDL input). <Setting value>...
Page 981 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level LGSW-DSP Setting whether or not to display [Log display ON/OFF] on the User mode screen [Default] 0: Do not display [Log display ON/OFF] [Default] 1: Display [Log display ON/OFF] PCL-COPY Supporting the PCL command [COPIES Meru/Pinatubo/Hood] <Setting value>...
Page 982 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level SLP-SLCT Switch of the existing network application <Setting value> 0: Not use [Default] 1: Use When the machine is set its range as "1", it will not move to the sleep mode PS-MODE Setting PS internal mode <Setting value>...
Page 983 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Total A1 Total A2 Total A (Large) Total A (Small) Total A (Full-color 1) Total A (Full-color 2) Total A (Black-and-white 1) Total A (Black-and-white 2) Total A (Monochrome / Large) Total A (Monochrome / Small) Total A (Black-and-white / Large) Total A (Black-and-white / Small) Total A1 (Duplex)
Page 984 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Remote copy (Total 2) Remote copy (Large) Remote copy (Small) Copy (Full-color 1) Copy (Full-color 2) Copy (Monochrome 1) Copy (Monochrome 2) Copy (Black-and-white 1) Copy (Black-and-white 2) Copy (Full-color / Large) Copy (Full-color / Small) Copy (Monochrome / Large) Copy (Monochrome / Small) Copy (Black-and-white / Large)
Page 985 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Local copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 2) Local copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 1) Local copy (Full-color / Large / Duplex) Local copy (Full-color / Small / Duplex) Local copy (Monochrome / Large / Duplex) Local copy (Monochrome / Small / Duplex) Local copy (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex) Local copy (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex)
Page 986 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support PDL print (Total 2) PDL print (Large) PDL print (Small) PDL print (Full-color 1) PDL print (Full-color 2) PDL print (Black-and-white 1) PDL print (Black-and-white 2) PDL print (Full-color / Large) PDL print (Full-color / Small) PDL print (Black-and-white / Large) PDL print (Black-and-white / Small) PDL print (Full-color / Large / Duplex)
Page 987 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Box print (Monochrome / Large) Box print (Monochrome / Small) Box print (Black-and-white / Large) Box print (Black-and-white / Small) Box print (Full-color + Monochrome / Large) Box print (Full-color + Monochrome / Small) Box print (Full-color + Monochrome / 2) Box print (Full-color + Monochrome / 1) Box print (Full-color / Large / Duplex) Box print (Full-color / Small / Duplex)
Page 988 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Report print (Full-color / Small / Duplex) Report print (Gray-scale / Large / Duplex) Report print (Gray-scale / Small / Duplex) Report print (Monochrome / Large / Duplex) Report print (Monochrome / Small / Duplex) Copy scan total 1 (Color) Copy scan total 1 (Black-and-white) Copy scan total 2 (Color)
Page 989 Chapter 17 T-17-176 COPIER > OPTION > CST Sub-item Description Level P-SZ-C1/C2 Use it to specify paper size used in the front deck (C1: right deck, C2: left deck). After electing the appropriate paper size, be sure to turn off and then on the main power switch.
Page 990 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > ACC Sub-item Description Level PD-SIZE Setting the Paper Deck Size <Setting value> 0: [Default] 22: K-LGL 23: K-LGLR 24: FLSC 25: A-FLS 26: OFI 27: E-OFI 28: B-OFI 29: A-LTR 30: A-LTRR 31: G-LTR 32: G-LTRR 33: A-LGL 34: G-LGL...
Page 991: Copier List
Chapter 17 COPIER >OPTION >LCNS-TR Sub-item Description Level TR-ENPDF Acquiring a transfer license key for the encrypted PDF send function in transfer invalidation ST-SPDF Displaying the searchable PDF send function installation status in transfer invalidation and executing transfer invalidation TR-SPDF Acquiring a transfer license key for the searchable PDF send function in transfer invalidation ST-EXPDF...
Page 992 Selecting several types of firmware installed on the hard disk and switching the country, language, and paper size type of this machine <Adjustment method> XXYYZZAAXX: Country (UP), YY: Language (ja), ZZ (00) Destination (00:CANON 01:OEM), AA (00): Paper size type (00:AB 01:Inch 02:A 03:All size) <Operating procedure> 1) Select <CONFIG>.
Page 993 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level BASE-SW Switching from the MEAP-Full mode to the Base model <Setting value> 0: OFF (Base model), 1: ON (Full model) SC-L-CNT switches the thresh value for the scan counter (large/small). Setting value: 0 (B4 as threshold) or 1 (LTR as threshold) default: 0 IDL-MODE...
Page 994 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level DRUM-CLN Use it to select enhanced drum cleaning mode (stop sequence). MEMO: - The rotation of the drum is stopped for about 1 sec as soon as a specific number of prints have been made during copying, thereby recovering the cleaning performance of the cleaning blade.
Page 995 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level THICK-PR Use it to set the potential control mechanism for thick paper mode. <Setting value> 0: use value determined by potential control in plain paper mode (default) 1: use value determined by potential control in transparency mode TEMP-TBL Use it to select a fixing temperature.
Page 996 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level SMTPTXPN Use it to change the number of the SMTP transmission port: <Setting value> 0 to 65535 (in increments of 1) Default: 25 After a change, be sure to re-boot the machine. SMTPRXPN Use it to change the number of the SMTP reception port.
Page 997 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level CMD-PORT Turning the TOT asynchronous status communication port ON or OFF The port for asynchronous status communication in TUIF over TCP/IP is turned ON or OFF. <Setting value> 0: OFF [Default] 1: ON VBK-TBL changes the Vback environment control mechanism.
Page 998 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level ANIM-SW Turn MEAP application error/jam screen display ON or OFF <Setting value> 0: OFF (Display warning screen) [Default] 1: ON (Do not display warning screen) MEAP-SSL Setting the MEAP HTTPS port <Setting value>...
Page 999 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level IDPRN-SW switches over count job types of the group control counter. 0: increases the count for the PRINT category (Box print, Report print, SendLocal print, PDL print (default)). increase the count for the COPY category (COPY). 1: increases the count for the PRINT category (Report print, SendLocal print, PDL print) increases the count for the COPY category (COPY, Box print)
Page 1000 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level MF-LG-ST Setting the long mode key <Setting value> 0: Ordinary [Default] 1: Display a long mode key on the corresponding mode screen SPECK-DP Use it to enable/disable indication of a warning for dust detection in streamreading.
Page 1001 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level PRJOB-CP Setting the CCV count pulse at reception and report output <Setting value> 0: Do not output count pulse [Default] 1: Output count pulse DPT-ID-7 Registering the department ID and entering 7 digits for authentication <Setting value>...
Page 1002 Chapter 17 Software counter specifications 100 - 199: Total 200 - 299: Copy (001 to 099 added in case of shortage) 300 - 399: Print 400 - 499: Copy and print 500 - 599: Scan 600 - 699: Box print 700 - 799: Receive print 800 - 899: Report print 900 - 999: Send...
Page 1003 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Total A (Full-color / Large) Total A (Full-color / Small) Total A (Full-color + Monochrome / Large) Total A (Full-color + Monochrome / Small) Total A (Full-color + Monochrome 2) Total A (Full-color + Monochrome 1) Total B1 Total B2 Total B (Large)
Page 1004 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 1) Copy (Full-color / Large / Duplex) Copy (Full-color / Small / Duplex) Copy (Monochrome / Large / Duplex) Copy (Monochrome / Small / Duplex) Copy (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex) Copy (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex) Copy A (Full-color 1) Copy A (Full-color 2)
Page 1005 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Remote copy (Black-and-white / Large) Remote copy (Black-and-white / Small) Remote copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Large) Remote copy (Full-color + Monochrome / Small) Remote copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 2) Remote copy (Full-color + Monochrome / 1) Remote copy (Full-color / Large / Duplex) Remote copy (Full-color / Small / Duplex) Remote copy (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)
Page 1006 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Copy + Print (Monochrome / Small) Copy + Print (Monochrome 2) Copy + Print (Monochrome 1) Copy + Print (Full-color + Monochrome / Large) Copy + Print (Full-color + Monochrome / Small) Copy + Print (Full-color + Monochrome / 2) Copy + Print (Full-color + Monochrome / 1) Copy + Print (Large) Copy + Print (Small)
Page 1007 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Receive print (Full-color 1) Receive print (Full-color 2) Receive print (Gray-scale 1) Receive print (Gray-scale 2) Receive print (Monochrome 1) Receive print (Monochrome 2) Receive print (Full-color / Large) Receive print (Full-color / Small) Receive print (Gray-scale / Large) Receive print (Gray-scale / Small) Receive print (Monochrome / Large) Receive print (Monochrome / Small)
Page 1008 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Send scan total 1 (Black-and-white) Send scan total 2 (Color) Send scan total 2 (Black-and-white) Send scan total 3 (Color) Send scan total 3 (Black-and-white) Send scan total 4 (Color) Send scan total 4 (Black-and-white) Send scan total 5 (Color) Send scan total 5 (Black-and-white) Send scan total 6 (Color)
Page 1009 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > CST Sub-item Description Level CST-U2 Specify paper names which are used in the paper size group The paper sizes of U2 can be recognized as special size papers with the universal cassette when special size papers below are registered to U2. <Setting value>...
Page 1010 Chapter 17 T-17-185 COPIER > OPTION > INT-FACE Sub-item Description Level IMG-CONT Use it to recognize an external EFI controller. <Setting value> 0: There is no external controller. 1 to 4: There is an external controller. AP-OPT Permitting or prohibiting printing from the PrintMe application installed in the PS print server unit <Setting value>...
Page 1011: Copier List
Selecting several types of firmware installed on the hard disk and switching the country, language, and paper size type of this machine <Adjustment method> XXYYZZAAXX: Country (UP), YY: Language (ja), ZZ (00) Destination (00:CANON 01:OEM), AA (00): Paper size type (00:AB 01:Inch 02:A 03:All size) <Operating procedure> 1) Select <CONFIG>.
Page 1012 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level TR-SP-C2 Use it to set the transfer/separation output setting when the left deck is used, thereby preventing faults otherwise occurring. <Setting value> 0: setting for plain paper (default) 1: setting for recycled paper 2: setting for tracing paper TR-SP-C3 Use it to set the transfer/separation output setting when the cassette 3 is used,...
Page 1013 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level TRSW-P-B Use it to turn ON/OFF the transfer current output correction mechanism at the trailing edge of paper. <Setting value> 0: ON 1: OFF (default) SP-MODE Use it to turn ON/OFF the separation current output correction mechanism. <Setting value>...
Page 1014 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level IFAX-LIM Limiting the number of output lines when a large amount of data has been received by IFAX. <Setting value> 0: No limit 0 to 999 [Default: 500] THICK-PR Use it to set the potential control mechanism for thick paper mode. <Setting value>...
Page 1015 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level BK-BD-12 Use it to set black band monthly remedial mode (for December). <Setting value> Same as for January. SMTPTXPN Use it to change the number of the SMTP transmission port: <Setting value>...
Page 1016 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level NS-LGN Limiting the use of LOGIN for SMTP authentication This is set to limit the use of LOGIN for SMTP authentication in an environment where communication packets are encrypted <Setting value> 0: Dependent on the SMTP server [Default] 1: Do not use MEAP-PN...
Page 1017 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level COUNTER2to6 Setting Software counters 2 to 6 on the User mode screen <Setting value> 0 to 999 CONTROL Limiting the user of a control card for a PDL job <Setting value> 0: Do not use [Default] 1: Use B4-L-CNT...
Page 1018 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level MB-CCV Limiting the mailbox control card user <Setting value> 0: No 1: Yes [Default] PR-D-SEL Use it to set the density of printing (PDL input). <Setting value> 0 to 8 (4: default) 0 (light) <=>...
Page 1019 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level FREG-SW Setting whether or not to display the free section of the MEAP counter (SEND) <Setting value> 0: Do not display [Default] 1: Display IFAX-SZL Enabling or disabling the send size limit in IFAX transmission (not via server only) <Setting value>...
Page 1020 Chapter 17 - Total B: Total excluding local and remote copies and box prints - Copy: Local and remote copies - Copy A: Local and remote copies and box prints - Print: PDL, report, and box prints - Print A: PDL and report prints - Scan: Black-and-white and color scans T-17-189 Counter Description...
Page 1021 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Total B (Black-and-white 1) Total B (Black-and-white 2) Total B (Monochrome / Large) Total B (Monochrome / Small) Total B (Black-and-white / Large) Total B (Black-and-white / Small) Total B1 (Duplex) Total B2 (Duplex) Large B (Duplex) Small B (Duplex) Total B (Monochrome 1) Total B (Monochrome 2)
Page 1022 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Copy A (Black-and-white 2) Copy A (Full-color / Large) Copy A (Full-color / Small) Copy A (Monochrome / Large) Copy A (Monochrome / Small) Copy A (Black-and-white / Large) Copy A (Black-and-white / Small) Copy A (Full-color + Monochrome / Large) Copy A (Full-color + Monochrome / Small) Copy A (Full-color + Monochrome / 2) Copy A (Full-color + Monochrome / 1)
Page 1023 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Print (Total 1) Print (Total 2) Print (Large) Print (Small) Print A (Total 1) Print A (Total 2) Print A (Large) Print A (Small) Print (Full-color 1) Print (Full-color 2) Print (Monochrome 1) Print (Monochrome 2) Print (Black-and-white 1) Print (Black-and-white 2) Print (Full-color / Large)
Page 1024 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Copy + Print (Monochrome / Small) Copy + Print (Full-color / Large / Duplex) Copy + Print (Full-color / Small / Duplex) Copy + Print (Monochrome / Large / Duplex) Copy + Print (Monochrome / Small / Duplex) Copy + Print (Black-and-white / Large / Duplex) Copy + Print (Black-and-white / Small / Duplex) Scan (Total 1)
Page 1025 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Receive print (Full-color + Gray-scale / Large) Receive print (Full-color + Gray-scale / Small) Receive print (Full-color + Gray-scale 2) Receive print (Full-color + Gray-scale 1) Receive print (Full-color / Large / Duplex) Receive print (Full-color / Small / Duplex) Receive print (Gray-scale / Large / Duplex) Receive print (Gray-scale / Small / Duplex) Receive print (Monochrome / Large / Duplex)
Page 1026 Chapter 17 Counter Description Support Send scan total 7 (Black-and-white) Send scan total 8 (Color) Send scan total 8 (Black-and-white) Universal send scan total (Color) Universal send scan total (Black-and-white) Box scan (Color) Box scan (Black-and-white) Remote scan (Color) Remote scan (Black-and-white) Send scan / FAX (Color) Send scan / FAX (Black-and-white) Send scan / IFAX (Color)
Page 1027 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > CST Sub-item Description Level CST-U3 Specify paper names which are used in the paper size group The paper sizes of U3 can be recognized as special size papers with the universal cassette when special size papers below are registered to U3. <Settings value>...
Page 1028: Copier List
Chapter 17 [1] Status display 0: Not installed [Default] 1: Installed [2] Invalidation 0: Invalidate (Only 0 can be entered.) Transfer invalidation procedure 1. Select ST-XXXX, enter 0, and press the OK key. 2. A transfer license number (24 digits) is displayed at TR-XXXX. T-17-193 COPIER >OPTION >LCNS-TR Sub-item...
Page 1029 Selecting several types of firmware installed on the hard disk and switching the country, language, and paper size type of this machine <Adjustment method> XXYYZZAAXX: Country (UP), YY: Language (ja), ZZ (00) Destination (00:CANON 01:OEM), AA (00): Paper size type (00:AB 01:Inch 02:A 03:All size) <Operating procedure> 1) Select <CONFIG>.
Page 1030 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level TR-SP-DK Use it to set the transfer/separation output setting when the side paper deck is used. <Setting value> 0: setting for plain power (default) 1: setting for recycled paper 2: setting for tracing paper DEV-SLOW Use it to set the speed of the developing sleeve.
Page 1031 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level FTMP-DWN USE it to select enhanced stacking mode. MEMO: The fixing temperature is lowered to enhance stacking in the finisher. <Setting value> 0: OFF (default) 1: decrease by -5 deg C 2: decrease by -10 deg C 3: decrease by -15 deg C DRUM-CLN...
Page 1032 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level IFAX-LIM Limiting the number of output lines when a large amount of data has been received by IFAX. <Setting value> 0: No limit 0 to 999 [Default: 500] DF-BLINE Taking corrective measures against a black line caused by dust on the platen at flow read <Setting value>...
Page 1033 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level BK-BD-11 Use it to set black band monthly remedial mode (for November). <Setting value> Same as for January. BK-BD-12 Use it to set black band monthly remedial mode (for December). <Setting value>...
Page 1034 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level TRY-CHG Use it to change the control mechanism used to switch over trays when one becomes full. MEMO: This item is displayed only at the time of Stacker-A1 connection. STS-PORT Turning the TOT synchronous command communication port ON or OFF The port for Inquiry/Response (synchronous) command communication in TUIF over TCP/IP is turned ON or OFF.
Page 1035 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION > BODY Sub-item Description Level ANIM-SW Turn MEAP application error/jam screen display ON or OFF <Setting value> 0: OFF (Display warning screen) [Default] 1: ON (Do not display warning screen) MEAP-SSL Setting the MEAP HTTPS port <Setting value>...
Page 1036 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level IDPRN-SW switches over count job types of the group control counter. 0:increases the count for the PRINT category (Box print, Report print, SendLocal print, PDL print (default)). 1:increase the count for the COPY category (COPY). 1:increases the count for the PRINT category (Report print, SendLocal print, PDL print) 0:increases the count for the COPY category (COPY, Box print)
Page 1037 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level SPECK-DP Use it to enable/disable indication of a warning for dust detection in streamreading. <Setting value> 0: disable indication (default), 1: enable indication CNT-DISP Setting whether or not to display a serial number when the counter confirmation key is pressed <Setting value>...
Page 1038 Chapter 17 COPIER > OPTION >USER Sub-item Description Level RUI-RJT Disconnecting the HTTP port from RUI by three authentication failures <Setting value> 0: Invalid [Default] 1: Valid CTM-S06 Setting whether or not to erase the password from the export file of the file send address <Setting value>...

Canon ImageRunner iR8500 Series Service Manual

Table of Contents

Chapter 1 Introduction

Product Specifications

Chapter 2 Installation

Making Pre-Checks/Unpacking and Installation

Chapter 3 Basic Operation

Construction/Basic Sequence

Chapter 4 Main Controller

Table of Contents

Chapter 5 Original Exposure System

Construction/Basic Sequence

Chapter 6 Image Processing System

Quick Links

Service Manual

Chapters

Troubleshooting

Related Manuals for Canon ImageRunner iR8500 Series

Summary of Contents for Canon ImageRunner iR8500 Series